- Manuals
- Brands
- Mercedes-Benz
- Car
- E-Class
- Operating Instructions
Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions PDF
Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions PDF
COMAND Operating Instructions
Order no. 6515 6912 13 Part no. 204 584 61 82 Edition B 2012
2045846182{ 2045846182
CO MA
ND Op
era tin
gI ns tru
cti on s
Publication details Internet
Further information on Mercedes-Benz vehicles and Daimler AG can be found on the Internet at the following websites: http://www.mercedes-benz.com http://www.daimler.com
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have about the Operator's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: R822, D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.
Symbols $ Warning % Environmental note ! Possible damage to the vehicle + Tip X Instruction YY Continuation symbol (Y page) Page reference Display Display in the multifunction
display/COMAND Registered trademarks: RBluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. RiPod and iTunes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.A. and in other countries. RLogic7 is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries, Incorporated. RMicrosoft is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and in other countries. RSIRIUS and associated brands are registered trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio and associated brands are registered trademarks of the iBiquity Digital Corporation. RWindows media is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and in other countries. RGracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZagatSurvey and associated brands are registered trademarks of Zagat.
As at 16.02.2011
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you drive off, familiarize yourself with
your COMAND control panel and read this
manual. This will help you to obtain the
maximum use from your COMAND control
panel and to avoid endangering yourself and
others.
Depending on themodel and equipment level,
the functions and equipment of your
COMAND control panel may deviate from
certain descriptions and illustrations.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
systems to the state of the art and therefore
reserves the right to introduce changes in
design, equipment and technical features at
any time.
You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the
data, illustrations or descriptions in this
manual.
Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center
if you have further questions.
This manual is an integral part of the vehicle.
You should always keep it in the vehicle and
pass it on to the new owner if you sell the
vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
2045846182 2045846182{
Index ....................................................... 4
Introduction ......................................... 11
At a glance ........................................... 15
System settings .................................. 39
Navigation ........................................... 49
Telephone .......................................... 113
Audio .................................................. 143
Video .................................................. 185
Weather services .............................. 195
Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 207
Contents 3
1, 2, 3 ...
911 emergency call .......................... 115
A
Active partition (USB devices only)
Selecting ........................................ 163
Address book
Browsing ........................................ 136
Calling up ....................................... 136
Changing an entry .......................... 138
Connecting a call ........................... 139
Creating an entry ........................... 137
Deleting an entry ........................... 137
Details about an entry ................... 137
Importing contacts ........................ 141
Searching for an entry ................... 136
Starting route guidance ................. 139
Voice tag ....................................... 140
Address book entry
Adopting as a home address ............ 94
Showing the details ....................... 138
Address entry (example) .................... 54
Address entry menu ............................ 54
Alternative route ................................. 82
Area
Avoiding ......................................... 105
Audio AUX jack .................................. 182
Audio CD/DVD or MP3 mode
Switching to ................................... 157
Switching to (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 217
Audio DVD
Pause function ............................... 219
Stop function ................................. 159
Audio format
Setting (audio DVD mode) ............. 163
Autostore ........................................... 147
AUX jacks
CD/DVD drive ............................... 210
B
Back button ......................................... 19
Bird's-eye view .................................. 100
Bluetooth
Activating/deactivating ................... 45
External authorization .................... 118
General information ......................... 44
Interface ........................................ 115
Settings ........................................... 44
Telephony ...................................... 115
Bluetooth audio basic display ........ 176
Bluetooth audio device
Connecting .................................... 172
Reconnecting ................................. 174
Bluetooth audio mode
Switching on .................................. 175
Bluetooth device list ....................... 173
Bluetooth interface
Telephony ...................................... 114
Bluetooth interface telephony
Conditions ..................................... 115
Bluetooth telephone list ................. 116
Buttons on the COMAND
controller ............................................. 19
C
Call
Accepting .............................. 120, 121
Connecting .................................... 121
Rejecting ............................... 120, 121
Call lists ............................................. 129
Displaying details ........................... 130
Opening and selecting an entry ..... 129
Saving an entry in the address
book .............................................. 130
Storing an entry which has not yet
been stored ................................... 130
Car pool lanes ...................................... 53
Category
Satellite radio ................................ 150
Category list (music search) ............ 166
CD
Copy protection ............................. 165
Data medium ................................. 165
General information ....................... 165
Multisession .................................. 164
Playback options ........................... 163
Selecting a medium ....................... 159
Selecting a track ............................ 160
4 Index
CD/DVD
Ejecting (DVD drive) ....................... 155
Ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment
System) ......................................... 217
Inserting (DVD changer) ................ 154
Inserting (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 216
Changing direction
Announcement phase ...................... 78
Change of direction phase ............... 78
Preparation phase ............................ 78
Channel presets ................................ 146
Character entry ................................... 28
Characters
Entering ........................................... 31
City
Entering ........................................... 55
Clear button ......................................... 19
COMAND
Basic functions ................................ 33
Components .................................... 16
Switching on/off .............................. 33
COMAND controller ............................. 18
COMAND control panel ....................... 17
COMAND display ................................. 20
Cleaning instructions ....................... 22
Setting ............................................. 40
Switching on/off .............................. 33
COMAND operating system ................ 16
Compass function ............................. 108
Connecting a USB device ................. 157
Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... 165
Crosshair position
Saving .............................................. 99
D
Data carrier
MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 168
Data medium
Audio DVD ..................................... 164
CD/DVD ........................................ 165
MP3 ............................................... 164
Date format
Setting ............................................. 41
Deleting
Call lists ......................................... 131
Destination
Adopting from the list of previous
destinations ..................................... 96
Assigning a destination to an
address book entry .......................... 96
Destination entry ................................ 53
Address ........................................... 54
Destination memory ........................ 60
Intermediate stop ............................ 62
Last destination ............................... 61
Map ................................................. 61
Point of interest ............................... 66
Using geo-coordinates ..................... 62
Destination information ..................... 83
Destination memory ........................... 94
Deleting an entry ............................. 97
My address ...................................... 94
Storing a destination ........................ 95
Destinations
Search & Send ................................. 76
Digital map
Updating ........................................ 109
Displaying the track and album ....... 162
Distance
see Navigation, route overview
DTMF tones
Sending ......................................... 124
DVD
Copy protection ............................. 165
Data medium ................................. 165
Selecting a track ............................ 160
DVD menu .......................................... 190
DVD playback conditions ................. 187
DVD-Video
Picture settings .............................. 186
DVD-Video operation
Automatic picture shutoff .............. 186
Index 5
E
Entering characters
In navigation mode .......................... 28
In the address and the phone
book ................................................ 31
Using the number pad ..................... 29
Entry
Deleting ........................................... 30
Saving .............................................. 32
Selecting ........................................ 127
Example display
Audio CD mode .............................. 158
MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 169
Example of operation .......................... 27
F
Favorites button .................................. 45
Favorites buttons ................................ 19
First list entry
Accepting ......................................... 30
Freeway information ......................... 103
Frequency input
Manual ........................................... 146
Function restrictions
Telephone operation ...................... 115
Video DVD mode ........................... 187
G
Google Maps ...................................... 76
Gracenote Media Database .............. 161
H
Hands-free microphone
Switching on/off ........................... 123
Harman/kardon Logic 7
Surround Sound system ..................... 35
Home address ...................................... 94
Entering and saving ......................... 57
Selecting from the destination
memory ........................................... 60
I
Incident (traffic report) ....................... 88
Indicator lamp
Remote control .............................. 211
Individualization
Activating/deactivating ................... 44
Intermediate stop
Deleting ........................................... 64
Entering ........................................... 62
iPod
Alphabetical track selection .......... 181
Connecting to the Media
Interface ........................................ 178
Selecting a category/playlist ......... 180
iTunes ............................................... 181
L
Lane recommendations ...................... 79
Explanation ...................................... 80
Presentation .................................... 80
List as selection list
Calling up ......................................... 30
Load/eject button ............................. 154
Logic 7
see harman/kardon Logic 7
Surround Sound system
M
Map
Arrival time/distance to
destination ..................................... 102
Calling up ......................................... 61
City model ..................................... 103
Map settings .................................. 100
Moving ....................................... 61, 99
Showing geo-coordinates .............. 102
Showing road names ..................... 102
Showing the map data version ....... 108
Topographic map ........................... 103
Map information ................................ 102
Map orientation ................................. 100
Map scale
Adjusting ......................................... 98
Media Interface
Basic menu .................................... 179
Connection options ....................... 178
iPod ............................................. 178
Mode ............................................. 178
Notes for the MP3 player ............... 182
Selecting music files ...................... 180
6 Index
Switching to ................................... 179
USB mass storage device .............. 178
Media list ........................................... 159
Menu
Exiting .............................................. 36
Points of interest ............................. 66
Showing ........................................... 51
System settings ............................... 21
Menu item
Selecting .......................................... 27
Menu overview
COMAND ......................................... 21
Mobile phone
Authorizing .................................... 117
Connecting (Bluetooth interface) . 116
De-authorizing ............................... 119
External authorization .................... 118
Registering (authorizing) ................ 116
MP3
Bit/sampling rates ......................... 165
Copyright ....................................... 165
Data medium ................................. 164
File systems ................................... 164
Formats ......................................... 164
Selecting a medium ....................... 159
Multifunction display .......................... 23
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 22
Multisession CDs ............................... 164
Music files
Recording ...................................... 169
MUSIC REGISTER
Deleting all music files ................... 170
Disk space information .................. 170
Playback options ........................... 171
Switching to ................................... 168
Music search ..................................... 165
My address
see Home address
N
Navigation (also see route
guidance)
Traffic report .................................... 88
Navigation announcements
Switching off .............................. 33, 81
Navigation mode
Switching to ..................................... 51
North up orientation ......................... 100
O
Off-map ................................................ 87
Off-road ................................................ 87
Orientation in direction of travel ..... 100
P
Passcode
Entering ......................................... 117
Pause function ................................... 158
Personal point of interest
Selecting as the destination ............. 75
Personal points of interest
Displaying on the map ..................... 72
Managing categories ........................ 73
Saving .............................................. 74
Settings ........................................... 72
Visual information ............................ 73
Phone book
Adding a number to an address
book entry ..................................... 128
Calling up ....................................... 125
Creating a new entry ..................... 128
Deleting an entry ........................... 127
Icon overview ................................. 126
Phone book entry
Searching ...................................... 126
Playback options ............................... 163
Point of interest
Category .......................................... 68
Defining the position for the point
of interest search ............................. 67
Entering ........................................... 66
Entering using the map .................... 71
ZAGAT rating service ..................... 70
Point of interest icon
Setting ........................................... 101
Point of interest list ............................ 69
With character bar ........................... 71
Previous destinations ......................... 97
Index 7
R
Radio mode
Switching to ................................... 144
Radio station
Storing ........................................... 146
Read-aloud function ............................ 93
Read-aloud speed
Setting ............................................. 42
Real-time traffic reports ..................... 88
Rear-compartment screens .............. 209
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Adjusting sound settings ............... 214
Adjusting the brightness ................ 214
Adjusting the color ........................ 214
Adjusting the contrast ................... 214
AUX mode ...................................... 228
CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 216
Changing the batteries .................. 212
Changing the picture format .......... 215
Cordless headphones .................... 211
Multiple users ................................ 214
Operating with the headphones ..... 213
System settings ............................. 215
Using the main loudspeaker .......... 213
Video DVD mode ........................... 221
Recording the route
Viewing the route on the map .......... 86
Redial .................................................. 122
Remote control
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 209
Reset .................................................... 47
Route
Calculating ....................................... 57
Estimated time of arrival .................. 83
Recording ........................................ 85
Route overview ................................ 84
Route calculation
Starting ............................................ 57
Route display ....................................... 84
Route guidance .................................... 77
Canceling ......................................... 81
Continuing ....................................... 81
Destination reached ......................... 81
Lane recommendations ................... 79
Off-road ........................................... 87
Traffic reports .................................. 88
Route options
Setting ............................................. 52
Route overview .................................... 84
Route type
Setting ............................................. 52
S
Safety notes
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 154
Using the telephone ....................... 114
Video DVD mode ........................... 186
SatRadio ............................................. 148
Displaying information ................... 153
Registering .................................... 149
Selecting a category ...................... 150
Switching to ................................... 149
Screen
Selecting for remote operation ...... 210
SD memory card
Ejecting .......................................... 157
Inserting ........................................ 157
Search & Send ...................................... 76
SIRIUS weather display
5-day forecast ................................ 197
Daily forecast ................................. 197
Detail information .......................... 197
Information chart ........................... 196
Selecting the area for the weather
forecast ......................................... 197
Switching on/off ........................... 196
Weather map ................................. 200
Skipping back
CD/DVD mode .............................. 161
Skipping forwards
CD/DVD mode .............................. 161
SMS
Read aloud ..................................... 133
Sound
Switching on/off .............................. 33
Sound settings ..................................... 34
Speed dial list
Storing a phone book entry in the
speed dial list ................................ 131
State/province
Selecting .......................................... 54
8 Index
Station
Selecting ........................................ 146
Storing ........................................... 146
Station search ................................... 146
Storage options
Selecting .......................................... 96
Summer and standard time
Switching ......................................... 41
Surround sound ................................... 35
System language
Setting ............................................. 45
T
Telephone
Ending an active call ...................... 123
Entering phone numbers ................ 121
Incoming call ................................. 120
Making a call ................................. 123
Making a call via speed dial ........... 122
Outgoing call ................................. 121
Redialing ........................................ 122
Rejecting/accepting a waiting
call ................................................. 123
Sending DTMF tones ...................... 124
Single call ...................................... 122
Switching hands-free microphone
on/off ............................................ 123
Toggling ......................................... 124
Telephone basic menu
Bluetooth interface ...................... 119
Telephone number
Entering ......................................... 121
Text messages (SMS)
Calling the sender .......................... 134
Deleting ......................................... 135
Inbox .............................................. 133
Information and requirements ....... 133
Reading .......................................... 133
Storing sender in address book ..... 135
Time
Setting the time ............................... 41
Time format
Setting ............................................. 41
Time zone
Setting ............................................. 41
Tone settings
Balance and fader ............................ 34
Treble and bass ............................... 34
Track
Selecting ........................................ 218
Track information .............................. 220
Traffic jam function ............................. 82
Traffic Program
Switching off .................................... 33
Traffic report read-aloud function ..... 93
Treble and bass
Adjusting ......................................... 34
U
Using the telephone .......................... 120
V
V-Cards
Receiving ....................................... 142
Video DVD
Fast forward/rewind ...................... 189
Operation ....................................... 186
Pause function ............................... 189
Selecting ........................................ 190
Selecting a film/title ...................... 189
Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 189
Showing/hiding the control menu . 188
Stop function ................................. 189
Video DVD mode
Switching to ................................... 187
Voice Control System
Settings ........................................... 42
Volume
Adjusting ......................................... 33
Navigation announcements ............. 33
Phone calls ...................................... 34
W
Waveband
Switching (radio) ............................ 145
Waypoints
Accepting waypoints for the route ... 66
Editing .............................................. 65
Entering ........................................... 64
Index 9
Weather map (SIRIUS)
Calling up ....................................... 200
Legend ........................................... 204
Moving ........................................... 200
Showing/hiding layers ................... 201
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 200
Time stamp .................................... 205
Weather memory (SIRIUS)
Selecting an area ........................... 199
Storing an area .............................. 199
Z
ZAGAT rating service ........................ 70
10 Index
Operating safety
General notes
G WARNING
Any alterations of electronic components or
software can cause malfunctions.
Radio, satellite radio, amplifier, DVD changer,
navigation module, telephone and Voice
Control systems are interconnected.
Therefore, if one of the components is not
operational, or has not been removed/
replaced properly, the function of other
components could be impaired.
Such conditions might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend having any service work on
electronic components carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G WARNING
In order to avoid distraction which could lead
to an accident, the driver should enter system
settingswhile the vehicle is at a standstill, and
operate the system only when permitted by
road, weather and traffic conditions.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30mph
(approximately 50km/h), your car covers a
distance of 44feet (approximately 14m) every
second.
COMAND supplies you with information to
help you select your route more easily and
guide you conveniently and safely to your
destination. For safety reasons, we
encourage the driver to stop the vehicle in a
safe place before answering or placing a call,
or consulting the COMAND screen to read
navigational maps, instructions, or
downloaded information.
G WARNING
While the navigation system provides
directional assistance, the driver must remain
focused on safe driving behavior, especially
attention to traffic and street signs, and
should utilize the system's audio cues while
driving.
The navigation system does not supply any
information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic
regulations or traffic safety rules. Their
observance always remains in the driver's
personal responsibility. DVD maps do not
cover all areas nor all routes within an area.
i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
G WARNING
Change or modification not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
! Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
ClassA digital device, pursuant to Part15
of the FCCRules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can
Introduction 11
Z
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
G WARNING
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
equipment and meets the FCC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in
Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that is deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be
installed and operated with at least 8 inches
(20cm) and more between the radiator and a
person's body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and legs.)
Correct use
Observe the following informationwhen using
COMAND:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rall road traffic regulations
i Improper work on electronic components or other systems (such as radio, DVD
changer) and their software may result in
malfunction or failure. Even systems that
have not been modified could be affected
because the electronic systems are
connected. Electronic malfunctions can
seriously jeopardize the operational safety
of your vehicle.
i Roof antenna functionality (telephone, satellite radio, GPS) can be affected by the
use of roof carrier systems.
Retrofitting metalized plastic films to the
windows can affect radio reception and
lead to poorer reception of all other
antennas (e.g. emergency call antennas)
inside the vehicle.
i Only have repairs or changes to electronic components carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools
to carry out the work required. Daimler
recommends that you use an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In
particular, work relevant to safety or on
safety-related systems must be carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Protection against theft: this device is equipped with technical provisions to
protect it against theft. Further information
on protection against theft can be obtained
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Information on copyright
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is protected by
U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Rovi
Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only, unless
otherwise authorized by Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
libjpeg
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
Free Type
Portions of this software are copyright2005
The FreeType Project http://
www.freetype.org.
All rights reserved.
NetFront
This product contains NetFront Browser
software of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright
1996-2010 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights
reserved.
12 Introduction
The NetFront Browser software is based in
part on the work of the Independent JPEG
Group.
Camellia
Copyright 2006, 2007 NTT (Nippon
Telegraph and Telephone Corporation).
All rights reserved.
The conditions and disclaimers in connection
with use of Camellia are available at http://
info.isl.ntt.co.jp/crypt/eng/index.html.
Flash Lite
This product contains Flash Lite
technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
This product contains Adobe Flash player
software under license from Adobe Systems
Incorporated, Copyright 1995-2010 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe and Flash are registered
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
in the United States and/or other countries.
COMAND features
These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND system at the time of
purchase. Country-specific deviations are
possible. Please note that your COMAND
system may not be equipped with all the
features described. This includes safety-
related systems and functions. Therefore, the
equipment on your COMAND system may
differ from that in the descriptions and
illustrations. The original purchase
agreement lists all systems installed in your
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center if you have any questions about
equipment or operation.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some COMAND functions
are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle
is in motion. You will notice this, for example,
because you will either not be able to select
certain menu items or because COMAND will
display a message to this effect.
Introduction 13
Z
14
COMAND operating system ............... 16
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 22
Operating COMAND ............................ 26
Basic functions of COMAND ............... 33
Climate control status display ........... 36
Rear view camera ............................... 37
15
A t a g la n c e
COMAND operating system
Overview
Example
Function Page
: COMAND display 20
; COMAND control panel
with DVD changer 17
= COMAND controller 18
Back button (left) 19
Clear button (right) 19
Favorites button (left) 19
Favorites button (right) 19
i Depending on the vehicle equipment, up to two favorites buttons may be available
in the M-Class.
Components of COMAND
COMAND consists of:
Rthe COMAND display
Rthe COMAND control panel with DVD
changer
Rthe COMAND controller
Rthe back and clear buttons
Rdepending on the vehicle equipment, up to
two favorites buttons (e.g. M-Class)
You can use COMAND to operate the
following main functions:
Rthe navigation system
Rthe audio function with radio and satellite
radiomodes, disc (CD/audio DVD andMP3
mode), memory card (MP3 mode), MUSIC
REGISTER, USB storage device, Media
Interface, Bluetooth audio and audio AUX
Rthe telephone with text message function
and the address book
Rthe video function with video DVD and
video AUX modes
Rthe weather service SIRIUS Weather
Rthe system settings
You can call up the main functions:
Rusing the corresponding function buttons
Rusing themain function bar in the COMAND
display (Y page 20)
i You can transfer an audio or video source selected in COMAND to the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
16 COMAND operating system A t a g la n c e
COMAND control panel
Function Page
: Switches to radio mode 144
Switches wavebands 145
Switches to satellite radio 149
; Switches to navigation
mode 51
Shows the menu system 51
= Pressh repeatedly
Switches to audio CD,
audio DVD and MP3 mode
or DVD video mode 157
Switches to memory card
mode 157
Switches to MUSIC
REGISTER 168
Switches to USB storage
device mode 157
Switches to Media
Interface or audio AUX
mode 179
Switches to Bluetooth
audio mode 175
Function Page
? Calls up the telephone
basic menu:
Bluetooth interface
telephony 119
A V Load/eject button 154
B Selects a station using the
station search function 146
Rewind 161
Selects the previous track 160
C Disc slot
Loads CDs/DVDs 154
Ejects CDs/DVDs 155
Updates the digital map 109
D Selects a station using the
station search function 146
Fast forwards 161
Selects the next track 160
E Clear button
Deletes characters 30
Deletes an entry 30
COMAND operating system 17
A t a g la n c e
Function Page
F Number pad
Selects stations via the
station presets 146
Stores stations manually 146
Mobile phone
authorization 117
Telephone number entry 121
Sends DTMF tones 124
Character entry 28
Selects a location for the
weather forecast from the
memory 199
z Displays the current
track being played 162
g Selects stations by
entering the frequency
manually 146
g Selects a track 160
G Switches COMAND on/off 33
Adjusts the volume 33
Function Page
H SD memory card slot 157
I Calls up the system menu 27
J Accepts a call 121
Dials a number 121
Redials 122
Accepts a waiting call 123
K Mute 33
Switches the hands-free
microphone on/off 123
Cancels the text message
read-aloud function 133
Switches off navigation
announcements 33
L Rejects a call 121
Ends an active call 123
Rejects a waiting call 123
COMAND controller
Example: M-Class
: COMAND controller
You can use the COMAND controller to select
the menu items in the COMAND display.
You can call up menus or lists, scroll through
menus or lists and exit menus or lists.
Operating the COMAND controller (example)
The COMAND controller can be:
Rpressed briefly or pressed and heldW
Rturned clockwise or counter-clockwise cVd
Rslid left or right XVY
Rslid forwards or back ZV
Rslid diagonally aVb
18 COMAND operating system A t a g la n c e
In the instructions, operating sequences are
described as follows:
X Press the$ button.
Radio mode is activated.
X Select Radio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Confirm Station List by pressingW. The station list appears.
Buttons on the COMAND controller
Overview
Example: M-Class
: Back button
; Clear button
= Favorites button (if available)
? Favorites button
i Depending on the vehicle equipment, up to two favorites buttons may be available
in the M-Class.
Back button
You can exit a menu or call up the basic
display of the current operating mode using
this button.
X To exit the menu: press back button:
briefly.
COMAND changes to the next higher menu
level in the current operating mode.
i You can also exit a menu by sliding XVY or ZV the COMAND controller.
X To call up the basic display: press and
hold back button:.
COMAND changes to the basic display of
the current operating mode.
Clear button
You can delete individual characters or an
entire entry during character entry using this
button.
X To delete individual characters: briefly
press clear button;.
X To delete an entire entry: press and hold
clear button;.
Favorites buttons
Depending on the vehicle equipment, up to
two favorites buttons may be available in the
M-Class.
You can assign predefined functions to
favorites buttons= and? and call them up
by pressing the button (Y page 45).
COMAND operating system 19
A t a g la n c e
COMAND display
Display overview
The COMAND display shows the function currently selected and its associated menus. The
COMAND display is divided into several areas.
The radio display is shown in the example.
: Status bar
; To call up the audio menu
= Main function bar
? Display/selection window
A Radio menu bar
Status bar: shows the time and the current settings for telephone operation.
Themain functions navigation, audio, telephone and video feature additional menus. These
are indicated by triangle;. The following table lists the available menu items.
Main function bar= allows you to call up the desired main function.
In the example, the audio main function is set to radio mode and display/selection
window? is active.
Radio menu barA allows you to operate the radio functions.
20 COMAND operating system A t a g la n c e
Menu overview
Navi Audio Telephon
e
Video System Symbol
Route settings FM/AM radio
(using HD
Radio)
Telephone Video DVD Calling up
the system
menu
Calling up
the
weather
service
SIRIUS
Weather
Map settings Satellite radio Address
book
AUX
Personal points
of interest
Disc
O Activating/ deactivating road
name
announcement
Memory card
O Audio fadeout on/off
MUSIC
REGISTER
O Activating/ deactivating the
alternative
routes function
Bluetooth
audio
Avoiding an area Media
Interface
SIRIUS service Rear
Map version AUX
System menu overview
Settings Time Consumption Display off
Display settings Setting the time Calling up the fuel
consumption
display
Switching off
the display
Text reader speed Setting the format
Language Setting the time
zone
Voice-operated control
settings
COMAND operating system 21
A t a g la n c e
Settings Time Consumption Display off
Rear view camera
Activating/deactivating
Bluetooth
Resetting COMAND
i Delete your personal data using this function, for
example before selling your
vehicle.
If equipped with the rear view camera: if the function is activated and COMAND is
switched on, the image from the rear view camera is automatically shown in the COMAND
display when reverse gear is engaged.
Cleaning instructions
! Do not touch the COMAND display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss
surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you
have to clean the screen, however, use a
mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free
cloth.
The display must be switched off and cooled
down before you start cleaning. Clean the
display screen, when necessary, with a
commercially available microfiber cloth and
cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible
damage. Then, dry the surface with a dry
microfiber cloth.
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or
abrasive cleaning agents. These could
damage the display surface.
Multifunction steering wheel
Example: SLK
Function Page
: Multifunction display (see
the vehicle Operator's
Manual)
; ?
Activates voice control (see
the separate operating
instructions)
22 Multifunction steering wheel A t a g la n c e
Function Page
= ~
Rejects or ends a call 120
6
Makes or accepts a call 121
Switches to the redial
memory 122
WX
Adjusts the volume 33
8
Mutes 33
? =;
Selects a menu 122
9:
Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 122
a
Confirms selections and
fades out messages 122
A %
Back or switches off voice
control (see the separate
operating instructions)
Operating the multifunction display
G WARNING
A driver's attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephonewhile driving, please use the hands-
free device and only use the telephone when
weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
X To select a menu: press the= or; button.
X To select a submenu or scroll through
the list: press the9 or: button.
X To select the next menu up: press the
% button.
X To call up standard displays: repeatedly
press the% button until the total
distance recorder and the trip meter
appear in the display.
or
X Press and hold the% button until the
total distance recorder and the trip meter
appear in the display.
X To confirm your selection: press the
a button.
X To confirm the message: press the
a or% button.
Menus and submenus
The number of menus depends on the vehicle
equipment.
Menu Functions and submenus
Navigation Navigation system displays
Audio Selects a station
Operates the DVD changer,
SD memory card, MUSIC
REGISTER, USB device,
Bluetooth audio and Media
Interface
Operates video DVD
Telephone Accepts/rejects a call
Makes/ends a call
Selects a phone book entry
Redials
Multifunction steering wheel 23
A t a g la n c e
Z
Navigation system menu
Route guidance inactive
The display shows the road on which the
vehicle is currently traveling, provided the
digital map contains it.
Route guidance active
The display shows:
Rthe distance to the destination
Rthe distance to the next change of direction
Rcurrent street
Rthe travel direction arrow
If a change of direction is imminent, the
display shows, for example, the following
information.
The route guidance display with the change of direction (example)
: Road to which the change of direction
leads
; Distance to the change of direction and
distance graphic
= Lane recommendation
? Change of direction icon
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation= for the next change
of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Audio menu
Adjusting the volume
X Press theW orX button.
Setting the station/channel
X Switch on COMAND (Y page 33).
X Switch on FM / AM Radio (Y page 144) or
Sat Radio (Y page 149).
X In the multifunction display, select the
audio menu with the= or; button.
X To select the next/previous station/
channel from the memory: briefly press
the: or9 button.
X To select the next/previous station/
channel: press and hold the: or
9 button.
Operating the DVD changer/memory
card/USB device/MUSIC REGISTER/
Bluetooth audio/Media Interface
X Switch on COMAND (Y page 33).
X Switch on Disc, Memory Card
(Y page 157), Music
Register(Y page 168), Bluetooth audio
(Y page 172) or Media Int.
(Y page 179).
X In the multifunction display, select the
audio menu with the= or; button.
X To select the next/previous track:
briefly press the: or9 button.
X To search for the next/previous track:
press and hold the: or9 button.
i When you play a CD/DVD with track information, the track name and number
are shown in the multifunction display. The
track name is displayed when an MP3 CD
is being played.
24 Multifunction steering wheel A t a g la n c e
Operating video DVD
X Switch on COMAND (Y page 33).
X Switch on DVD-Video (Y page 187).
X In the multifunction display, select the
audio menu with the= or; button.
X To select the next/previous scene:
briefly press the: or9 button.
Telephone menu
G WARNING
A driver's attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use themobile
phone while driving, please use the handsfree
device and only use the mobile phone when
weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular mobile phone while driving a
vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Operating the telephone
X Switch on COMAND (Y page 33).
X Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 119).
If the telephone has not yet been authorized,
the Bluetooth Ready message appears in
the multifunction display.
If the telephone is switched on and
authorized, the Phone Ready message
appears in the multifunction display.
Accepting a call
X Press the6 button.
Multifunction display (example)
The display shows the phone number or the
nameandphone number (if the entry is stored
in the address book) or shows the Unknown
(phone number withheld) message.
i You can also accept the call by voice command using the Voice Control System
(see the separate operating instructions).
Rejecting or ending a call
X Press the~ button.
Calling a number from the phone book
X Use= or; to select the Phone
menu.
X Press:,9 or9 to switch to the phone book.
X Press: or9 to select the name you
want.
i The saved names are displayed alphabetically.
i If you hold down the: or9 button
for longer than one second, rapid scroll
begins. Themultifunction display goes from
the seventh entry displayed to the first
entry under the following letter. Release
the button to stop.
X To connect a call: press6 or9 on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Connecting call... message
appears in the multifunction display along
with the number being dialed and the
name, if it is stored in the phone book.
Multifunction steering wheel 25
A t a g la n c e
Z
The number dialed is stored in the
corresponding call list.
i If there are several numbers for this name, you see a list of sub-entries.
X Press: or9 to select the
phone number you want.
X Press the6 or9 button again to place the call.
Redialing
COMAND saves the last phone numbers or
names dialed.
X Press the=; buttons to select the
Phone menu.
X Press the; button to open the list of
dialed numbers.
X Press the:9 buttons to select the
desired name or phone number.
X To connect a call: press6 or9 on the multifunction steering wheel.
Operating COMAND
Selecting a main function
Initial situation
You would like to switch from navigation
mode (address entry menu) to the system
settings, for example.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Address Entry and pressW to confirm.
The address entry menu appears.
Address entry menu
: Main function bar
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller and switch to main function bar:.
X Select System in the main function bar by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The system menu appears.
Calling up themenuof amain function
If one of the main functions navigation, audio,
telephone or video is switched on,
triangle: appears next to the entry in the
main function bar. You can now select an
associated menu.
The example describes how to call up the
audio menu from audio CD mode (an audio
CD is playing).
26 Operating COMAND A t a g la n c e
: To call up the audio menu
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Audio menu appears.
Audio menu
The# dot indicates the current audio mode.
X Select another audio mode, e.g. Radio, by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Radio mode is activated.
Selecting a menu item
The example describes how to select a station
from the station presets in radio mode.
X Press the$ function button.
X Select Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The station preset memory appears.
X Select the station by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The station is set.
Example of operation
Initial situation
You would like to switch from the system
function to radio mode and set a station, for
example.
The operating example describes how to:
Rcall up the current audio function
Rswitch on radio mode
Rset a station
X To call up the system menu: press the
W button.
System menu
Operating COMAND 27
A t a g la n c e
Z
Calling up the current audio function
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The basic display of the current audio
function, e.g. audio CD mode, appears.
: To call up the audio menu
Switching to radio mode
Option 1
X Press the$ function button.
The radio display appears.
i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches between the FM, AM and WB
wavebands in that order and then calls up
SatRadio mode. Pressing the button again
takes you back to FM radio mode.
Option 2
X Select Audio again by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The Audio menu appears. Radio is
highlighted.
X PressW the COMAND controller and
confirm Radio.
The radio basic display appears with the
waveband last selected.
X To set a station: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/
selection window is active.
Entering characters in navigation
mode (entering a city)
General information
Character entry is explained in the following
sections using NEW YORK as an example for
entering a city.
If you want to use the address entry menu
(Y page 54) to enter a city, a street or a
house number, for example, COMAND
provides either a list with a character bar
(option 1) or a selection list (option 2).
You can enter the characters using either the
character bar or the number keypad. In the
28 Operating COMAND A t a g la n c e
selection list, you select an entry to copy it to
the address entry menu.
Option 1: city list/street list with
character bar
X Call up the city list with character bar
(Y page 55).
The alphabetically sorted city list shows the
first available entries.
Entering characters using the character
bar
X Select N by turning COMAND controller
cVd and pressW to confirm.
: N character entered by user
; ANTICOKE characters automatically
added by COMAND
= List entry that most closely resembles the
current entry by the user
? To switch to the selection list
A To delete an entry
B Characters not currently available
C Characters currently available
D Currently selected character
E Character bar
F To cancel an entry
G List
ListG shows all available city names
beginning with N. The list entry most closely
resembling user's current entry= is always
highlighted at the top of the list (NANTICOKE
in the example).
All characters that have been entered are
displayed in black, the letter N in
example:. The letters that are added
automatically by COMAND are displayed in
gray;, ANTICOKE in the example.
Character barE shows the letters still
available for selection in blackC. These can
be selected; in the example, the letter O is
highlightedD. Which characters remain
available depends on the characters already
entered by the user and on the data stored on
the digital map. Characters that are no longer
available are shown in grayB.
X Select E, W, space, Y in order and confirm
each withW.
Entering characters using the number
keypad
X Press number keyp twice in quick
succession to select the letter N.
The character appears at the bottom of the
display when the key is pressed. The first
available letter is highlighted.
You see which characters you can enter with
that key. Each time the key is pressed, the
next character is selected.
Example: keyp:
Rpress once = M
Rpress twice = N
Rpress three times = O
X Wait until the character display goes out.
The entries matching your input are shown
in the list.
Operating COMAND 29
A t a g la n c e
Z
X Enter E, W, space, Y with the corresponding
keys.
i The space is entered using number key 9.
Further functions in the list with
character bar
X To delete characters: select2 by
slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the2 button next to the
COMAND controller.
X To delete an entry: select the2 icon
by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller, and then pressW and hold until the entire entry is deleted.
or
X Press and hold the2 button next to the
COMAND controller until the entire entry is
deleted.
X To cancel an entry: select the& icon in
the bottom left of the character bar and
pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the% back button.
The address entry menu appears.
X Toaccept the first list entry:pressW and hold the COMAND controller until the
address entry menu appears.
The accepted list entry is shown there.
Calling up the list as a selection list
Select the desired city from the selection list.
If there are several entries for a city or if
several cities of the same name are stored,
then is highlighted in the character bar.
X PressW the COMAND controller.
It is also possible to switch the city list to the
selection list at any time during character
input.
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the city list appears as a
selection list.
or
X Select in the character bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Option 2: city list as selection list
COMAND either shows the selection list
automatically or you can call up the selection
list from the list with character bar.
The example shows the selection list after the
city NEW YORK has been entered. The entry is
highlighted automatically.
X Confirm NEW YORK by pressingW the COMAND controller.
The address entry menu appears. You can
now enter a street, for example.
30 Operating COMAND A t a g la n c e
i You will find further information in the "Destination entry" section (Y page 53).
Entering characters in the address
book and in the phone book
Introduction
The following section describes how to enter
characters in the phone book (Y page 125)
and in the address book (Y page 137) when
creating a new entry.
Creating a new entry in the phone book
X Call up the input menu with data fields
(Y page 128).
Phone book: input menu with data fields
Creating a new entry in the address
book
X Call up the input menu with data fields
(Y page 137).
Input menu with data fields
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
Entering characters
The example describes how to enter the
surname Schulz.
X Select S by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
S is entered into the data field. All
characters are shown in black and can
always be selected in the character bar.
The character bar offers characters
corresponding to the respective data field
(letters or digits).
: To switch the character bar to
uppercase/lowercase letters
; To switch the character bar from
uppercase/lowercase letters to digits
= To change the language of the character
bar
? To delete a character/an entry
Operating COMAND 31
A t a g la n c e
Z
X Select c and confirm by pressingW the COMAND controller.
The letter c is added to S in the data field.
X Repeat the process until the name has
been entered in full.
X To enter a phone number: select the
digits one by one in the corresponding data
field by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Switching data fields
If youwant to enter a first name after you have
entered a surname, for example, proceed as
follows to switch between the data fields:
Option 1
X Select the4 or5 icon in the character bar and pressW to confirm. The input menu shows the data field
selected.
: Cursor in the next data field
; To store an entry
= 4 and5 icons to select a data field
Option 2
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the character bar
disappears.
X Select the data field by sliding ZV and pressW to confirm.
Storing an entry
X Select in the character bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The entry is stored in the address book.
Further functions available in the
character bar
X To switch the character bar to
uppercase/lowercase characters:
select* orE and pressW to confirm.
X To switch the character set: select
p and pressW to confirm. The character set switches between
uppercase/lowercase letters and digits.
X To change the language of the
character bar: selectB and pressW to confirm.
X Select the language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X To reposition the cursorwithin the data
field: select the2 or3 icon and press W to confirm.
: Cursor (repositioned)
; 2 and3 icon to reposition the cursor
X Delete the character/entry (Y page 30).
32 Operating COMAND A t a g la n c e
Basic functions of COMAND
Switching COMAND on/off
X Press theq control knob. A warning message appears. COMAND
calls up the previously selected menu.
i If you switch off COMAND, playback of the current audio or video source will also
be switched off.
Switching the COMAND display on/
off
X Press theW function button.
or
X Select System in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. In both cases, the system menu appears.
X To switch off: select Display Off and
pressW to confirm.
X To switch on: press one of the function
buttons, e.g.W, or the% back
button.
Mute
Sound from an audio/video source
X Press the8 button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The sound from the respective audio or
video source is switched on or muted.
i When the sound is off, the system displays the, icon in the status line.
When you change the audio or video
source, or adjust the volume, sound
automatically switches on again.
i Even if the sound is switched off, you will still hear navigation system
announcements.
Switching off all navigation
announcements
X Navigation announcements: press the
8 button during the announcement.
Switching navigation announcements
back on
X Press8 again.
i The navigation announcements are switched on again if you start a new route
guidance or if COMAND is switched off and
on with theq control knob.
Adjusting the volume
Adjusting the volume for the audio or
video source
X Turn theq control knob.
or
X Press theW orX button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
The volume of the currently selected audio
or video source changes.
You can also adjust the volume for the
following:
Rnavigation announcements
Rphone calls
Rvoice output of the Voice Control System
(see the separate operating instructions)
Adjusting the volume for navigation
announcements
During a navigation announcement:
X Turnq the control knob.
or
X Press theW orX button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Basic functions of COMAND 33
A t a g la n c e
Z
Adjusting the volume for phone calls
You can adjust the volume for hands-free
mode during a telephone call.
X Turn theq control knob.
or
X Press theW orX button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Adjusting the sound settings
Calling up the sound menu
You can make various sound settings for the
different audio and video sources. Thismeans
that it is possible to set more bass for radio
mode than for audio CD mode, for example.
You can call up the respective sound menu
from the menu of the desired mode.
The example describes how to call up the
sound menu in radio mode.
X Press the$ function button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband.
X Select Sound by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can now set the treble and bass or the
balance and fader for radio mode.
Adjusting treble and bass
X Select Treble or Bass in the sound menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.
Adjusting the bass (example)
X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The setting is stored and you exit themenu.
Adjusting balance and fader
With the balance function, you can control
whether the sound is louder on the driver's or
front-passenger side.
The fade function is used to control whether
the sound is louder in the front or the rear of
the vehicle.
X Select Balance or Bal./Fad. (balance/
fader) in the sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Example: balance and fader settings
34 Basic functions of COMAND A t a g la n c e
X Select a balance setting by sliding XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select a fader setting by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The setting is stored and you exit themenu.
Surround sound
General information
If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/
kardon Logic7 surround sound system,
you can set the optimum surround sound in
the vehicle interior.
The harman/kardonLogic7 surround
sound system is available for the following
operating modes:
Rradio (FM only)
Rsatellite radio
Raudio CD
Raudio DVD (MLP, dts, PCM and Dolby
Digital audio formats)
RMP3 (including SD memory card and USB
storage device)
RMedia Interface
RBluetooth audio mode
Rvideo DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digital
audio formats)
RAUX
Because some DVDs contain both stereo and
multichannel audio formats, it may be
necessary to set the audio format
(Y page 163).
i The Logic7 On function creates a surround sound experience for every
passenger when playing, for example,
stereo recordings. It enables optimum
playback of music and films on CD, audio
DVD or video DVD with multichannel audio
formats, such as MLP, dts or Dolby Digital.
This results in sound characteristics like
those intended by the sound engineer
when the original was recorded.
i If you select Logic7 Off, all permissible formats are played as stored on the
medium. Due to the design of the
passenger compartment, an optimum
audio experience cannot be guaranteed for
all passengers.
i Discs which support the audio formats mentioned have the following logos:
Dolby Digital
dts
MLP
Switching surround sound on/off
The example describes how to set the
surround sound for radio mode.
X Press the$ function button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband.
Basic functions of COMAND 35
A t a g la n c e
Z
X Select Sound by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select surround and pressW to confirm.
Setting surround sound (example)
X Select Logic7 On or Logic7 Off by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Depending on your selection, surround
sound is switched on or off and the menu
is exited.
X To exit the menu without saving: press
the% back button or slide XVY the COMAND controller.
i Please note the following: for the optimum audio experience for all
passengers when Logic7 is switched on,
the balance and fader settings should be
set to the center of the vehicle interior.
You will achieve the best sound results by
playing high-quality audio and video DVDs.
MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least
128 kbit/s.
Surround-sound playback does not
function for mono signal sources, such as
AM radio mode.
If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel,
you should switch off Logic7, as it may
otherwise switch between stereo and
mono and cause temporary sound
distortions.
On some stereo recordings, the sound
characteristics may differ from
conventional stereo playback.
Climate control status display
If you change the settings of the climate
control system (see the vehicle Operator's
Manual), the climate status display appears
for three seconds at the bottom of the screen
in the COMAND display. It displays the
current settings of the various climate control
functions.
The climate status display appears when:
X Turn one of the two temperature controls
and set the temperature for the left or
right1, 2 or turn the temperature control and
set the temperature3, 4.
or
X Turn the control to set the airflow3, 4.
or
X You press one of the following buttons:
K Increases air flow1, 2
I Decreases air flow1, 2
Switches climate control on/off1, 2, 3
Switches the ZONE function on/
off1, 2
1 Available for 2-zone automatic climate control.
2 Available for 3-zone automatic climate control.
3 Available for the air-conditioning system.
4 Available for Heatmatic.
36 Climate control status display A t a g la n c e
Controls the climate control
automatically1, 2
Sets the climate control style to
automatic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/
DIFFUSE)2
_ Sets the air distribution1, 2
M,P orO Sets the air
distribution3, 4.
Activates the defrost function1, 2, 3, 4
Switches on maximum cooling
i The climate status display does not appear when the image from the rear view
camera is displayed.
The climate status display in the COMAND display (example)
The illustration shows an example of the
current settings for:
Rthe defroster function (top)
Rclimate mode in automatic mode (center)
Rmaximum cooling (bottom)
X To hide the display: turn or press the
COMAND controller.
or
X Press one of the buttons on the COMAND
operating system.
i A detailed description of the climate control is available in the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Rear view camera
G WARNING
The rear view camera is merely an aid.
Please observe the corresponding notes in
your vehicle's Operator's Manual.
The image from the rear view camera is
shown in the COMAND display when reverse
gear is engaged, if:
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a rear view
camera.
RCOMAND is activated.
Rthe Activation by R gear function is
activated.
If the function is activated, the COMAND
display will automatically switch back to the
previously selected display as soon as you
shift out of reverse gear.
i Further information on the rear view camera driving system can be found in the
vehicle Operator's Manual.
X Press theW function button.
The system menu appears.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Rear View Camera and pressW to confirm.
1 Available for 2-zone automatic climate control.
2 Available for 3-zone automatic climate control.
3 Available for the air-conditioning system.
4 Available for Heatmatic.
Rear view camera 37
A t a g la n c e
Z
X Select Activation by R gear and press
W to confirm. The function is switched onO or off, depending on the previous status.
i If a side view camera is available, using COMANDyou can switch from the rear view
camera picture to the side view camera
picture, see the "System settings" section.
38 Rear view camera A t a g la n c e
COMAND features ............................... 40
Display settings .................................. 40
Time settings ....................................... 40
Fuel consumption display .................. 41
ON&OFFROAD display ......................... 42
Text reader settings ............................ 42
Voice Control System settings .......... 42
Bluetooth settings ............................ 44
Setting the system language ............. 45
Assigning the favorites button .......... 45
Importing/exporting data .................. 46
Reset function ..................................... 47
39
S y s t e m s e t t in g s
COMAND features
These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND system at the time of
purchase. Country-specific deviations are
possible. Please note that your COMAND
system may not be equipped with all the
features described.
Display settings
Setting the brightness
The brightness detected by the display light
sensor affects the setting options for this
function.
X Press theW button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Display and pressW to confirm.
X Select Brightness and pressW to confirm.
X Adjust the brightness by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Display design
Your COMAND display features optimized
designs for operation during the day and at
night. You can set the design by manually
selecting day or night design or opt for an
automatic setting.
X Press theW button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Display and pressW to confirm.
X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or
Automatic by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A dot indicates the current setting.
Design Explanation
Day Mode The display is set
permanently to day
design.
Night Mode The display is set
permanently to night
design.
Automatic In the Automatic
setting, COMAND
evaluates the readings
from the automatic
vehicle light sensor and
switches between the
display designs
automatically.
Time settings
General information
If COMAND is equipped with a navigation
system and has GPS reception, COMAND
automatically sets the time and date. You can
also adjust the time yourself in 30-minute
increments, but the date cannot be changed.
i If you set the time in 30-minute increments, any time zone settings and
settings for changing between summer and
standard time are lost (Y page 41).
40 Time settings S y s t e m s e t t in g s
i The following navigation system functions
require the time, time zone and summer/
standard time to be set correctly in order
to work properly:
Rroute guidance on routes with time-
dependent traffic guidance
Rcalculation of expected time of arrival
Setting the time
X Press theW button.
X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Set Time and pressW to confirm.
X Set the time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The time is accepted.
Setting the time/date format
X Press theW button.
X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Format and pressW to confirm. The# symbols show the current settings.
Abbreviation Meaning
DD / MM / YY Day/Month/Year
(date format)
HH/MM Hours/Minutes
(time format)
You can set the 24-hour or the AM/PM
format.
X Set the format by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Setting the time zone and switching
between summer and standard time
X Press theW button.
X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Time Zone and pressW to confirm. You will see a list of time zones. The# dot indicates the current setting.
X Select the time zone and pressW to confirm.
X To switch automatic changeover on/
off: select Auto. Daylight Savings
Time On or Auto. Daylight Savings
Time Off by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The# dot indicates the current setting.
Fuel consumption display
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
COMAND display shows fuel consumption.
If your vehicle is a dual energy vehicle and the
installed engine variant supports it, you can
call up other displays (see the separate
operating instructions).
Fuel consumption display 41
S y s t e m s e t t in g s
Calling up displays
X Press theW button.
X In the system menu, slide ZV the
COMAND controller up until the Full
Screen option is selected.
X PressW the COMAND controller. The system display is shown as full screen
(without system menu).
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeatedly until the fuel consumption
indicator appears.
The COMAND display shows the fuel
consumption for the last 15 minutes of the
journey.
Every bar of the graph displays the average
value for one minute.
The fuel consumption display may differ from
the display in the From Start trip computer
in the Tripmenu; see the vehicle Operator's
Manual.
Exiting full screen view
X PressW the COMAND controller. The system menu appears.
ON&OFFROAD display
Overview
The ON&OFFROAD display is available for the
M-Class.
The COMAND display can show the settings
and status of the ON&OFFROAD functions.
You can find more information about the
ON&OFFROAD functions and the display
itself in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Calling up displays
X Press theW button.
X In the system menu, slide ZV the COMAND controller up until the display/
selection window is selected.
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until the ON&OFFROAD display appears.
The COMAND display shows the settings
and status of the ON&OFFROAD functions.
Exiting the display
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until the desired display (clock or fuel
consumption) is shown.
Text reader settings
Setting the text reader speed
X Press theW button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Text Reader Speed and pressW to confirm.
A list appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Voice Control System settings
Opening/closing the help window
In addition to the audible instructions, the
help window will show you other information
42 Voice Control System settings S y s t e m s e t t in g s
during voice control operation and the
individualization process.
X Press theW button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Voice Control and pressW to confirm.
X Select Help Window and pressW to confirm.
You have switched the help window on
O or off.
Individualization
Introduction
You can use the individualization function to
fine tune the Voice Control System to your
voice and therefore improve voice
recognition. This means that other users'
voices will not be recognized as easily, and
therefore this function can be deactivated
(Y page 44).
Individualization comprises two parts and
takes approximately five minutes. It consists
of training the system to recognize a certain
number of digit sequences and voice
commands.
Starting new individualization
Individualization can only be started when the
vehicle is stationary. Before starting, switch
off all devices or functions which could
interfere, such as the radio or the navigation
system. After starting the session, the system
guides you through the training with spoken
instructions.
X Press theW button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Voice Control and pressW to confirm.
X Select Start New Individualization
and pressW to confirm. You see and hear a prompt asking whether
you would like further information.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select No, the first part of
individualization begins. You will be asked
whether you would like to train digits or
voice commands.
If you select Yes, you will see and hear
information on the individualization
process. The first part of individualization
then begins automatically.
X To close the display: pressW the COMAND controller.
You will be asked whether you would like
to train digits or voice commands.
At the end of the first part, a prompt will
appear asking whether you wish to begin the
second part.
Voice Control System settings 43
S y s t e m s e t t in g s
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select No, individualization will be
canceled. The data from the first part is
stored automatically.
If you select Yes, the second part will begin.
Individualization is completed at the end of
the second part. You will see a message to
this effect. The data from the second part is
stored automatically.
Canceling the first or second part of
individualization
X Confirm Cancel by pressingW the COMAND controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to cancel.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the voice training will be
canceled. The data from the part during
which you exited is not stored.
If you select No, the current part begins
again.
Deleting existing individualization data
X Press theW button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Voice Control and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete Individualization and
pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to delete.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
If you select Yes, the individualization is
deleted. You will see a message to this
effect.
Activating/deactivating
individualization
X Press theW button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Voice Control and pressW to confirm.
X Select Individualization On and press
W to confirm. Individualization is activatedO or deactivated.
Bluetooth settings
General information about
Bluetooth
Bluetooth-capable devices, e.g. mobile
phones, must comply with a certain profile in
order to be connected to COMAND. Every
Bluetooth device has its own specific
Bluetooth name.
Bluetooth technology is the standard for
short-range wireless data transmission of up
to approximately 10 meters. Bluetooth
allows, for example, the exchange of vCards.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
44 Bluetooth settings S y s t e m s e t t in g s
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
X Press theW button.
The system menu appears.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Activate Bluetooth and press
W to confirm.
This switches Bluetooth onO or off.
Setting the system language
This function allows you to determine the
language for the menu displays and the
navigation announcements. The navigation
announcements are not available in all
languages. If a language is not available, the
navigation announcements will be in English.
The selected language affects the characters
available for entry.
When you set the system language, the
language of the Voice Control System will
change accordingly. If the selected language
is not supported by the Voice Control System,
English will be selected.
X Press theW button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Language and pressW to confirm. The list of languages appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.
X Select the language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
COMAND loads the selected language and
sets it.
Assigning the favorites button
This function is available, e.g. for theM-Class.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
assign one or two favorites buttons. They are
located on the left (one favorites button
installed) or on the left and right (two favorites
buttons installed) beside the COMAND
controller (Y page 19).
You can select the following predefined
functions in a menu:
RDisplay On/Off: you can switch the
display off or on.
RFull Screen: 'Clock': you can show the
clock in full screen.
RFull Screen: 'Map': you can show the
map in full screen.
RSpoken Driving Tip: you can call up the
current driving recommendation.
RDisplay Traffic Messages: you can call
up traffic reports.
RNavigate Home: you can start route
guidance to your home address if you have
already entered and saved the address
(Y page 57).
RDetour Menu: you can call up the Detour
menu and then avoid a section of the route
and recalculate the route (Y page 82).
RCompass Screen: you can call up the
compass.
X To assign a favorites button: press the
W button.
X Select Settings by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Assigning the favorites button 45
S y s t e m s e t t in g s
X Select Assign As Favorite and press
W to confirm. The list of predefined functions appears.
If your vehicle is equipped with a favorites
button, the# dot indicates the currently selected function.
If your vehicle is equipped with two
favorites buttons, two asterisks indicate
the currently selected function for the
respective favorites button.
X Select the function by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
If your vehicle is equipped with a favorites
button, it is assigned with the function
selected.
If your vehicle is equipped with two
favorites buttons, you will see a submenu.
X Select the favorites button by turning
cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The favorites button selected is assigned
the predefined function.
X To call up a favorite (example): press the
g favorites button.
This calls up the predefined function.
Importing/exporting data
You can use this function to copy your
personal COMAND data from one system
(vehicle) to another system (vehicle) or to
create a backup copy of your personal data
(exporting data) and import it again
(importing data). You can either use an SD
memory card or a USB storage device (e.g. a
USB stick) as temporary storage.
i Personal music files in the MUSIC REGISTER cannot be saved and imported
again using this function.
X Press theW button.
The system menu appears.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Import/Export Data and press
W to confirm.
X Select Import Data or Export Data and
pressW to confirm.
X To select a storage location: insert the
memory card (Y page 157) or insert the
USB storage device (Y page 157) into the
USB port.
X Select Memory Card or USB Storage and
pressW to confirm.
Example: export data menu
X To select all data: select All Data and
pressW to confirm. This function exports all the data to the
selected disc.
X Select the data type and pressW to confirm.
Depending on the previous entry, either
select the data type for the exportO or not.
46 Importing/exporting data S y s t e m s e t t in g s
! Never remove the stick or card when writing data to the USB stick or thememory
card You may otherwise lose data.
Reset function
You can reset COMAND to the factory
settings. Among other things, this will delete
all personal COMAND data (e.g. station
presets, entries in the destination memory
and in the list of previous destinations in the
navigation system, address book entries).
Resetting is recommended before selling or
transferring ownership of your vehicle, for
example.
Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music
files in the MUSIC REGISTER, will be deleted.
You can also delete music files from the
MUSIC REGISTER using the "Delete all music
files" (Y page 170) function.
X Press theW function button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Reset and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to reset.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
If you select Yes, a promptwill appear again
asking whether you really wish to reset.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, a message will be shown.
COMAND is reset and restarted.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
Reset function 47
S y s t e m s e t t in g s
48
COMAND features ............................... 50
Introduction ......................................... 50
Basic settings ...................................... 52
Destination entry ................................ 53
Entering a point of interest ................ 66
Personal points of interest ................. 72
Search & Send ..................................... 76
Route guidance ................................... 77
Traffic reports ..................................... 88
Destination memory ........................... 94
Previous destinations ......................... 97
Map operation and settings ............... 98
Additional settings ........................... 105
Problems with the navigation sys-
tem ..................................................... 111
49
N a v ig a t io n
COMAND features
These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND system at the time of
purchase. Country-specific deviations are
possible. Please note that your COMAND
system may not be equipped with all the
features described.
Introduction
Safety notes
G WARNING
For safety reasons, only enter a destination
when the vehicle is stationary. When the
vehicle is in motion, a passenger should enter
the destination. Study manual and select
route before driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
COMAND calculates the route to the
destination without taking account of the
following:
RTraffic lights
RStop and right-of-way-signs
RLane merging
RParking or stopping prohibited areas
ROther road and traffic rules and regulations
RNarrow bridges
G WARNING
COMAND may give incorrect navigation
commands if the data in the digital map does
not correspond with the actual road/traffic
situation. Digital maps do not cover all areas
nor all routes within an area. For example, if
the traffic routing has been changed or the
direction of a one-way road has been
reversed.
For this reason, you must always observe
applicable road and traffic rules and
regulations during your journey. Road and
traffic rules and regulations always have
priority over the navigation commands
generated by the system.
G WARNING
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of
consulting the map display for directions.
Consulting the symbols or map display for
directions may cause you to divert your
attention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident.
General notes
Operational readiness of the navigation
system
The navigation system must determine the
position of the vehicle before first use or
whenever operational status is restored.
Therefore, you may have to drive for a while
before precise route guidance is possible.
GPS reception
Correct functioning of the navigation system
depends, amongst other things, on GPS
reception. In certain situations, GPS
reception may be impaired, there may be
interference or there may be no reception at
all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages.
Entry restriction
On vehicles for certain countries, there is a
restriction on entering data.
The restriction is active above a vehicle speed
of about 3 mph. The restriction is deactivated
as soon as the vehicle speed drops below
about 2 mph.
When the restriction is active, certain entries
cannot be made. This will be indicated by the
50 Introduction N a v ig a t io n
fact that certain menu items are grayed out
and cannot be selected.
The following entries are not possible, for
example:
Rentering the destination city and street
Rentering a destination via the map
Rentering points of interest in the vicinity of
a city or via a name search
Rediting entries
Rusing the number keypad for direct entry
Other entries are possible, such as entering
points of interest in the vicinity of the
destination or current position.
Addresses can be entered via the Voice
Control System (see the separate Operating
Instructions) while the vehicle is in motion.
Switching to navigation mode
Option 1
X Press the function button.
The map is displayed with the menu either
shown or hidden.
Option 2
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Themap is displayed with themenu shown.
Map showing the menu; route guidance inactive
: Status bar
; Main function bar
= Current vehicle position
? Navigation menu bar
Map without the menu; route guidance inactive
: Current vehicle position
; Map orientation selected
= Map scale selected
"Route guidance active" means that you have
entered a destination and that COMAND has
calculated the route. The display shows the
route, changes of direction and lane
recommendations. Navigation
announcements guide you to your
destination.
"Route guidance inactive" means that no
destination has been entered and that no
route has been calculated.
Showing/hiding the menu
X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full Screen
menu item is shown, pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the% back button.
The map can be seen in the full-screen
display.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller when the map is shown in full-
screen display.
Introduction 51
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Basic settings
Route settings
Setting route type and route options
You can select the following route types:
RFast Route: COMAND calculates a route
with the shortest (minimized) journey time.
RDynamic Traffic Route: same route
type as Fast Route. In addition, COMAND
takes any traffic reports received with
regard to the route into account during
route guidance. The navigation system can
help you avoid a traffic jam, for example, by
recalculating the route.
RDynamic TRF. Route After Request:
same route type as Dynamic Traffic
Route. After recalculating the route,
COMAND asks you whether you wish to
adopt the new route or whether you would
prefer to continue along the original route.
REco Route: the Eco Route (economic
route) is a variant of the Fast Route route
type. COMANDwill attempt tominimize the
journey distance at the expense of a slightly
increased journey time.
RShort Route: COMAND calculates a route
with the shortest possible (minimized)
route distance.
i On very long routes, the "Eco Route"more or less corresponds to the "Fast Route"
route type.
X To call up the route settingsmenu: press
the function button.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Route Settings and pressW to confirm.
Route settings menu (start of menu)
: To select the route type
; To set the number of persons in the
vehicle for the use of carpool lanes
= To set route options
X Select a route type and pressW to confirm. A filled circle indicates the current setting.
X Select the route option(s) and pressW to confirm.
The route options are switched onO or off , depending on the previous status.
i If you change the route type and/or the route optionswhile route guidance is active
(the route has been calculated), COMAND
will calculate a new route.
If you change the route type and/or the
route options while route guidance is
inactive (no destination has been entered
yet), COMAND uses the new setting for the
next route guidance.
i The route calculated may, for example, include ferry connections, even if the
Avoid Ferries route option is switched
on.
In some cases, e.g. when calculating
particularly long routes, COMAND may not
be able to take all the selected route
options into account.
X To exit themenu: slide XVY the COMAND controller.
52 Basic settings N a v ig a t io n
Setting the number of persons in the
vehicle for the use of carpool lanes
For route calculation, you can take HOV or
carpool lanes into account.
If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please
observe the applicable laws as well as the
local and time limitation conditions.
Carpool lanesmay only be used under certain
conditions. Normally you can use these lanes
when two people are traveling in the vehicle.
However, there are lanes that can only be
used when three or four people (e.g. in New
York) travel in the vehicle. In California, lone
drivers can use a carpool lane if their vehicle's
emission level/fuel consumption is below a
fixed threshold.
Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific
times (e.g. during the peak period).
Carpool lanes are identified by HOV symbols
on special road signs and by markings on the
road. On the road signs, you may also see the
word CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged as a
separate lane next to the others or are built
as a physically separate lane.
Depending upon the Number of Occupants
in Vehicle setting, COMAND uses HOV or
carpool lanes when calculating a route.
COMAND then guides you with visual and
acoustic driving instructions onto or away
from HOV or carpool lanes.
X In the Route Settingsmenu, select Number
of Occupants in Vehicle by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X PressW the COMAND controller.
X Select 1, 2 or More than 2 by turning
cVd and confirm by pressingW. The# dot indicates the current setting.
Destination entry
Introduction to destination entry
G WARNING
For safety reasons, only enter a new
destination when the vehicle is stationary.
You could otherwise be distracted from the
traffic conditions, cause an accident and
injure yourself and others.
The following destination entry options are
available:
Rentering a destination by address
Rentering a destination from the destination
memory
Rentering a destination from the list of last
destinations
Rentering a destination using the map
Rentering a destination using geo-
coordinates
Rentering an intermediate stop
Rentering waypoints
Rentering a point of interest
Rentering a personal point of interest
Rentering a destination using "Search &
Send"
Destination entry 53
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Entering a destination by address
Introduction
When entering an address as the destination,
you have the following options:
Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code
and street
Rentering the state/province, city and
center
Rentering the state/province, city/zip code,
street and house number
Rentering the state/province, city/zip code,
street and intersection
Rentering the state/province, street, city
and house number
Rentering the state/province, street and
house number
Rentering the state/province, street and
intersection
i You can only enter those cities, streets, zip codes etc. that are stored in the digital
map. This means that for some countries,
you cannot enter zip codes, for example.
Example: entering an address
The following is a step-by-step example of
how to enter an address. The destination
address is as follows:
New York (state)
New York (city)
40 Broadway
Of course, you can freely enter information
like state/province, city, street and house
number, for example to enter your home
address.
Calling up the address entry menu
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Dest. by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select Address Entry and pressW to confirm.
The address entry menu appears. If you
have previously entered a destination, this
will be shown in the display.
Address entry menu
Depending on the sequence in which you
enter the address and on the data status of
the digital map, somemenu itemsmay not be
available at all or may not yet be available.
Example: after entering state/province, the
menu items Map, No., Center,
Intersection, Save and Start are not
available; or the menu item ZIP is not
available if the digital map does not have any
zip codes.
Selecting a state/province
X Select State/Prov in the address entry
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu with the available lists appears:
54 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n
RLast States/Provinces
RStates (U.S.A.)
RProvinces (Canada)
X To select a list: turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The list of selected states/provinces
appears.
X To select a state/province: turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The address entrymenu appears again. The
state/province selected has now been
entered.
Entering the city
X Select City in the address entry menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You will see the city list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Option 1: city list with the character bar
X Enter NEW YORK. Instructions for entering
characters can be found in the "Entering
characters in navigation mode (entering a
city)" section (Y page 28).
Option 2: city list as selection list
City list
X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.
The address entrymenu appears again. The
city has now been entered.
Entering a street name
X Select Street in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
You will see the street list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Option 1: street list with character bar
X Enter BROADWAY. Instructions for entering
characters using city input as an example
can be found in the "Entering characters in
navigation mode (entering a city)" section
(Y page 28).
Option 2: street list as selection list
Destination entry 55
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Street list
X Select a street by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
If an entry features theG icon, it cannot be uniquely assigned and a selection list
will open, allowing you to select the desired
entry.
X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.
The address entrymenu appears again. The
street has now been entered.
Entering the house number
It is not possible to enter a house number until
a street has been entered.
X Select No. in the address entry menu by
turning cVd and sliding ZV the
COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
You will see the house number list either
with the character bar (option 1) or as a
selection list (option 2).
Option 1: house number list with
character bar
X Enter 4 and 0. Instructions for entering
characters using city input as an example
can be found in the "Entering characters in
navigation mode (entering a city)" section
(Y page 28).
Option 2: house number list as selection
list
House number list
X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.
The address entrymenu appears again. The
house number has now been entered.
56 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n
Starting route calculation
You can now have COMAND calculate the
route to the address entered or save the
address first, e.g. as your home address (My
address) (Y page 57).
Address entry menu with destination address
: Destination address
; To start route calculation
X In the address entry menu, confirm Start
by pressingW. If no other route has been calculated, route
calculation starts immediately (Option 1). If
another route has already been calculated
(route guidance is active), a prompt
appears (option 2).
i Continue is displayed instead of Start when Calculate Alternative Routes is
activated in the navigation menu
(Y page 82), option 2.
Option 1 no route guidance active: route
calculation starts. While route calculation is
in progress, an arrow will indicate the
direction to your destination. Below this, you
will see a message, e.g. Calculating Fast
Route
Once the route has been calculated, route
guidance begins. If the vehicle is traveling on
a non-digitized road, the system displays the
linear distance to the destination, the
direction of the destination and the Off
Mapped Road message. The entries for the
estimated time of arrival and the distance to
the destination are, in this case, displayed in
gray.
Option 2 route guidance is already
active: if route guidance is already active, a
prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to terminate the currently active route
guidance.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND will stop route
guidance and start route calculation for the
new destination.
If you select No, COMAND will continue
with the active route guidance.
i Route calculation takes a certain amount of time. The time depends on the distance
from the destination, for example.
COMAND calculates the route using the
digital map data.
The calculated route can differ from the
ideal route, for example because of
incomplete map data. Please also refer to
the notes about the digital map
(Y page 109).
Entering and saving your home address
You can either enter your home address for
the first time (option 1) or edit a previously
stored home address (option 2).
X Option 1: enter the address, e.g. a city,
street and house number (Y page 55).
X Once you have entered the address, select
Save in the address entry menu by turning
cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Save as "My Address" and press
W to confirm.
COMAND stores your home address as My
Address in the destination memory.
X Option 2: proceed as described under
"Option 1".
A prompt appears asking whether the
current home address should be
overwritten.
Destination entry 57
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X Select Yes and pressW to confirm.
After selecting Yes, the Saving
Procedure Successful message
appears.
Entering a ZIP code
X Select ZIP in the address entry menu by
turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
You will see the zip code list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Option 1: ZIP code list with character bar
X Enter a ZIP code. Instructions for entering
characters using city input as an example
can be found in the "Entering characters in
navigation mode (entering a city)" section
(Y page 28).
: Digits entered by the user
; Digits automatically added by the system
= List entry most closely resembling the
characters entered so far
? To switch to the list without the character
bar
A To delete the entire entry: press and hold;
to delete the last character: press briefly
B Available characters
C Selected character
D Unavailable characters
E Character bar
F To cancel an entry
G List
Option 2: ZIP code list as selection list
ZIP code list
X Select the desired zip code by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.
If COMAND is able to assign the ZIP code
unambiguously to a specific address, the
address entry menu appears again. The ZIP
code appears in place of the city's name.
If COMAND cannot assign the ZIP code
unambiguously to a specific address, the
address entry menu also appears again.
The ZIP code is automatically entered. You
can now enter the street for a more precise
location. Only streets in the area covered
by the entered ZIP code are available.
X Start route calculation (Y page 57).
Entering a center
Entering a center will, for example, delete a
previously entered street.
X Select Center (center) in the address entry
menu by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
You will see the center list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Option 1: center list with character bar
X Enter a center. Instructions for entering
characters using city input as an example
can be found in the "Entering characters in
58 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n
navigation mode (entering a city)" section
(Y page 28).
Option 2: center list as selection list
X Select a center by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.
The address entrymenu appears again. The
center selected has been entered.
X Start route calculation (Y page 57).
Entering an intersection name
X Select Intersection (intersection) in the
address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You will see the intersection list either with
the character bar (option 1) or as a
selection list (option 2).
Option 1: intersection list with character
bar
X Enter an intersection. Instructions for
entering characters using city input as an
example can be found in the "Entering
characters in navigation mode (entering a
city)" section (Y page 28).
: List entry most closely resembling the
characters entered so far
; List
= Character bar
Option 2: intersection list as selection list
X Select an intersection by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.
The address entrymenu appears again. The
intersection selected has been entered.
X Start route calculation (Y page 57).
Destination entry 59
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Selecting a destination from the
destinationmemory (e.g. My address)
Introduction
The destination memory always contains an
entry named "My address". You may wish to
assign your home address to this entry, for
example (Y page 57), and select it for route
guidance. This entry is always located at the
top of the list in the destination memory.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select From Memory and pressW to confirm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2).
Option 1: destination memory list with
character bar
X Enter a destination, e.g. "My address".
Instructions for entering characters using
city input as an example can be found in the
"Entering characters in navigation mode
(entering a city)" section (Y page 31).
: Character entered by the user
; Characters automatically added by the
system
= List entry most closely resembling the
characters entered so far
? To switch to the selection list
A To delete an entry
B Characters not currently available
C Character bar
D Currently selected character
E To cancel an entry
F Characters currently available
Option 2: destination memory list as
selection list
Destination memory list
X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again.
"My address" has been entered.
60 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n
X To start route calculation: select Start
and pressW to confirm.
Entering a destination from the list of
last destinations
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select From Last Destinations and
pressW to confirm.
X Select the desired destination by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. The address entrymenu appears again. The
destination address selected has been
entered.
X To start route calculation: select Start
and pressW to confirm.
Once the route has been calculated, route
guidance begins (Y page 77).
i Further information on the "Last destinations" memory can be found on
(Y page 97).
Entering a destination using the map
Calling up the map
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select Using Map and pressW to confirm. You see the map with the crosshair.
: Current vehicle position
; Crosshair
= Details of the crosshair position
? Map scale selected
Display= depends on the settings selected
in "Map information in the display"
(Y page 102). The current street name can
be shown, provided the digital map contains
the necessary data, or the coordinates of the
crosshair if the geo-coordinate display is
switched on and the GPS signal is strong
enough.
Moving the map and selecting the
destination
X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller.
Destination entry 61
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. Turning clockwise zooms out from themap;
turning counter-clockwise zooms in.
X To select a destination: pressW the COMAND controller once or several times.
You will see either the address entry menu
with the destination address or, if COMAND
is unable to assign a unique address, a
selection list.
X Select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
If the destination is within the limits of the
digital map, COMAND attempts to assign
the destination to the map.
If the destination can be assigned, you will
see the address entry menu with the
address of the destination. If not, you will
see the entry Destination From Map.
X To start route calculation: select Start
and pressW to confirm.
Entering a destination using geo-
coordinates
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select Using Geo-Coordinates and
pressW to confirm. An entry menu appears.
You can now enter the latitude and longitude
coordinates.
X To change a value: turn cVd the COMAND controller.
X To move the mark within the line: slide
XVY the COMAND controller.
X To move the mark between the lines:
slide ZV the COMAND controller.
X To confirm the value: pressW the COMAND controller.
i If the selected position is outside the digital map, COMAND uses the nearest
digitized road for route calculation. You will
see the The position is off the map
message. If the selected position is located
over a body of water, you will see the
message: The destination is in a
body of water. Please select
another destination.
Entering an intermediate stop
Introduction
You can use this function to enter an
intermediate stop while the vehicle is in
motion. COMAND provides a selection of
62 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n
predefined destinations in eight categories
for this purpose, e.g. FILLING STATION or
CAF.
When you have entered your intermediate
stop, COMAND automatically recalculates
the route to the main destination.
Entering predefined destinations
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select Stopover and pressW to confirm.
Option 1: the route does not have an
intermediate stop.
Intermediate stop categories
X Select a category; see option 2.
Option 2: the route already has an
intermediate stop.
X Select Change Stopover and pressW to confirm.
X To select a category: select a category by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm. COMAND first searches in the selected
category for destinations along the route.
COMAND then searches for destinations in
a radius of approximately 60 mi from the
current vehicle position.
If COMAND finds destinations, a list
appears on the right-hand side of the
display.
Search results for the chosen category COFFEE SHOP (example)
: Highlighted intermediate stop, current
distance from the vehicle position and
name of the intermediate stop
The intermediate stops along the route are
displayed at the top of the list, sorted by
increasing distance from the vehicle's current
position. Below this, you will see the
intermediate stops that COMAND finds in the
vicinity of the vehicle's current position.
i For intermediate stops that are not located along the calculated route, the
linear distance is shown.
X Select the intermediate stop by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears, showing
the destination address.
X To start route calculation: select Start
and pressW to confirm.
If COMAND does not find any destinations,
you will see a message to this effect.
X Confirm OK by pressingW.
X Select a different category.
Destination entry 63
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Deleting an intermediate stop
If an intermediate stop has already been
entered, you can delete it.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select Stopover and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete Stopover and pressW to confirm.
COMAND deletes the intermediate stop
and recalculates the route to the main
destination.
Entering waypoints
Introduction
You can map the route yourself by entering
up to two waypoints. The sequence of the
waypoints can be changed at any time.
i An intermediate stop is always between the current position of the vehicle and the
first waypoint.
Creating waypoints
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select Intermediate Destinations and
pressW to confirm. The destination is entered in the menu.
Waypoint menu without waypoints
X Confirm the symbol for waypoint 1 by
pressingW the COMAND controller.
X Confirm Set by pressingW the COMAND controller.
X Enter the waypoint via one of the following
options.
Selection Step
Address Entry X Enter a
destination by
address
(Y page 54).
From Memory X Select a
destination from
the destination
memory
(Y page 60).
From Last
Destinations
X Select a
destination from
the list of last
destinations
(Y page 61).
64 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n
Selection Step
From POIs X Enter a point of
interest
(Y page 66).
From Personal
POIs
X Enter a
destination from
the personal
points of interest
(Y page 75).
Using Map X Enter a
destination using
the map
(Y page 61).
Using Geo-
Coordinates
X Enter a
destination using
the geo-
coordinates
(Y page 62).
When the entry is complete, the waypoint
appears.
X To accept the waypoint: confirm OK by
pressingW.
X To display the details: select Details by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X To make a call: select Call with the
COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. COMAND switches to telephone
mode (Y page 122).
i Thismenu item is available if thewaypoint has a telephone number and a mobile
phone is connected to COMAND
(Y page 116).
X To call up the map: select Map with the
COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X You can move the map and select the
destination.
X To store thewaypoint in thedestination
memory: select Presets with the
COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
When you have accepted the waypoint, it is
entered in the waypoint menu. The example
shows the menu with two entered waypoints.
Waypoint menu with two waypoints
Editing waypoints
You can:
Rchange waypoints
Rchange the sequence in the waypointmenu
Rdelete waypoints
To change the sequence, both waypoints
must be entered.
X To change waypoints: select the symbol
for waypoint 1 or 2 in the waypoint menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Edit and pressW to confirm.
X Use one of the destination entry options
offered.
Destination entry 65
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X To change the sequence of the
waypoints: select Swap in the waypoint
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The entries are swapped.
X To delete waypoints: select the symbol
for waypoint 1 or 2 in the waypoint menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm.
i You can delete a waypoint directly after entry using this menu item.
Accepting waypoints for the route
X Select Start in the waypoint menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The route is calculated with the entered
waypoints.
i Cont. is displayed instead of Startwhen Calculate Alternative Routes is
activated in the navigation menu
(Y page 82), option 2.
In the example, there are both waypoints1
and2.
Entering a point of interest
Calling up the points of interest menu
Points of interest are predefined destinations
within categories, e.g. a gas station in the
AUTOMOTIVE category.
You can look for points of interest:
Rin the vicinity of the destination
Rnear the current vehicle position
Rin the vicinity of another city
Rusing its name
Rusing a phone number
You can also select points of interest in the
map that are available on the map view
shown.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select From POIs and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.
Points of interest menu ("Search by name" selected)
66 Entering a point of interest N a v ig a t io n
Defining the position for the point of interest search
Selection Characteristic Instructions
Near
Destination
Entry is only possible
when route guidance is
active.
X Select Near Destination from the
points of interest menu (Y page 66) and
pressW to confirm.
X Select a point of interest category
(Y page 68).
Current
Position
The system looks for a
point of interest in the
vicinity of the current
vehicle position.
X Select Current Position in the points
of interest menu and pressW to confirm.
X Select a point of interest category
(Y page 68).
Other City After entering a city, the
system looks for the
point of interest within
the city.
Option 1
X Select Other City in the points of
interest menu and pressW to confirm.
X If desired, select the state/province
(Y page 54).
X Enter the city. Proceed as described in
the "Entering a city" section
(Y page 55).
X Select a point of interest category
(Y page 68).
Option 2
X Enter a city in the address entry menu
(Y page 54).
X Select POI and pressW to confirm.
X Select a point of interest category.
Entering a point of interest 67
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Selection Characteristic Instructions
Search By Name You can call up all the
points of interest in the
digital map or focus your
search on the three
previously selected
positions.
X Select Search By Name in the points of
interest menu and pressW to confirm.
X Select All POIs or one of the three
previously selected positions.
The point of interest list with character
bar appears.
X Proceed as described in the "point of
interest list with character bar" section
(Y page 71).
Search By Phone
Number
This function gives you
access to all points of
interest that have a
phone number.
X Select Search By Phone Number and
pressW to confirm. You will see a list of phone numbers.
X Proceed as described in the "point of
interest list with character bar" section
(Y page 71).
Searching by point of interest
category
After selecting the menu items, the point of
interest categories appear:
RNear Destination
RCurrent Position
ROther City (after entering a city)
i If you have selected Search By Name and then defined the position for the search,
the point of interest list with character bar
appears (Y page 71).
X Select a point of interest category by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
In the example, the AUTOMOTIVE category
has been selected. TheG arrow behind an entry shows that other categories are
available.
X Select a category and pressW to confirm. In the example, the Highway Rest Stop
category has been selected. The search for
points of interest begins in the vicinity of
the selected position.
68 Entering a point of interest N a v ig a t io n
Point of interest search near the current position (example)
i The point of interest search is canceled when 50 points of interest have been
found.
COMAND searches within a radius of
approximately 60 mi.
If COMAND fails to find a point of interest
within this radius, it extends its search
range to approximately 125 mi.
If COMAND finds one point of interest
within this radius, it finishes the search.
Once the search is completed, the point of
interest list is displayed.
Point of interest list
Introduction
The point of interest list displays the search
results for the selection made.
Point of interest list (example)
An entry contains the following information:
Ran arrow that shows the linear direction to
the point of interest
Rthe linear distance to the point of interest
Rthe name of the point of interest
i The arrow and linear distance to the destination are not visible if you have
entered a point of interest within a specific
city.
The arrow is also not shown when a point
of interest in the vicinity of the destination
has been entered.
Depending on the point of interest
selected, COMAND uses different
reference points in determining the linear
distance to the destination:
Rvicinity of current position: the linear
distance is the distance of the point of
interest from the current vehicle
position.
Rvicinity of destination: the linear distance
is the distance from the destination
entered to the point of interest.
Selecting a point of interest
The example has been selected in the point
of interest category BAR & RESTAURANT.
X Select the point of interest in the point of
interest list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The complete address of the point of
interest selected is shown.
Entering a point of interest 69
N a v ig a t io n
Z
: Point of interest with address
; To start route calculation
= To store an address in the destination
memory
? To display details
A To make a call (when available)
B To cancel selection
C To show an address on the map
X To start route calculation: select Start
and pressW to confirm.
X To store an address in the destination
memory: select Save and pressW to confirm. You can now select storage
options (Y page 96).
X To show the detailed view: select
Details and pressW to confirm.
X To make a call: select Call and pressW to confirm. COMAND switches to
telephone mode (Y page 122).
i This menu item is available if the point of interest has a telephone number and a
mobile phone is connected to COMAND
(Y page 116).
X To call up the map: select Map and press
W to confirm.
X You can move the map and select the
destination (Y page 61).
ZAGAT survey service
Entries with the Z icon contain additional
ZAGAT information. ZAGAT rates restaurants,
for instance, in regard to the quality of the
food, furnishing, service, and provides an
average pricing level as well as a general
description.
X Select the entry with the Z icon by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The ZAGAT evaluations appear.
1 ZAGAT ratings
2 To display details
X To show a description: select Details
and pressW to confirm.
ZAGAT example description
70 Entering a point of interest N a v ig a t io n
Point of interest list with character bar
If you have selected Search By Name in the
point of interest menu (Y page 66) and then
defined the position for the search
(Y page 67), the point of interest list with
character bar appears.
Depending on your selection, you can select
all available points of interest on the digital
map or the points of interest in the vicinity of
the selected position.
Search by name in the vicinity of the destination (example)
Proceed as described in the "Searching for a
phone book entry" section (Y page 126).
i If COMAND can assign the characters entered to one entry unambiguously, the
address entry appears automatically.
X To start route calculation: select Start
and pressW to confirm.
Selecting a point of interest using the
map
You can select points of interest that are
available in the selected (visible) section of
the map.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Guide in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If points of interest are available:
Depending on the map scale selected,
point of interest icons appear on the map.
The scale at which the icons are displayed
on the map varies according to the icon.
You can select the icons that COMAND will
display (Y page 101).
If no points of interest are available, youwill
see a message to this effect.
i You also see this message if you have selected the No Symbolsmenu item under
"Map display" (Y page 101).
X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.
Point of interest on the map
The point of interest is highlighted on the
map; you will see information on the upper
edge of the display.
X To select a point of interest: select
Next or Previous and pressW to confirm.
X To show details for the selection: select
Details and pressW to confirm.
X To change to the map: slide ZV the COMAND controller.
You can move the map and select the map
section.
Entering a point of interest 71
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X To start route calculation: select Start
and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the point
of interest should be used as the
destination.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, route guidance starts.
If you select No, you can choose a newpoint
of interest.
i Cont. is displayed instead of Startwhen Calculate Alternative Routes is
activated in the navigation menu
(Y page 82), option 2.
Personal points of interest
Settings
Overview
Personal destinations can be:
Rdisplayed on the map
Rhighlighted on the map as you approach
them
Rmanaged in categories
Rmanaged
Calling up the "Personal points of
interest" menu
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Personal POIs and pressW to confirm.
Displaying personal points of interest
on the map
The personal points of interest are shown on
the map with an icon according to their
category.
X Select Display Personal POIs On Map
in the menu and pressW to confirm. You can select different categories.
Selection Explanation
Not
Classified
Standard entry for
personal points of
interest
COMAND i This function is not available in the USA
and Canada.
If you have created your own categories
(e.g. "Fishing", "Hotels") (Y page 73),
these will also be displayed.
72 Personal points of interest N a v ig a t io n
X Select a category and pressW to confirm. The icon display is switched onO or off , depending on the previous status.
i The icons are displayed on the map at scales of 1/16 mi, 1/8 mi and 1/4 mi.
Visual information for personal points
of interest
When the vehicle is approaching a personal
point of interest and the display of the
relevant category is switched on, it is
highlighted on the map.
X Select Visual Warning For Personal
POIs in the menu and pressW to confirm.
X PressW to confirm the entry. This will switch the visual information for
the personal points of interest of this
category onO or off, depending on the previous setting.
Example: visual information for a personal point of interest
Managing categories for personal
points of interest
X Select Manage Categories For
Personal POIs in the menu and pressW to confirm.
X To create a new category: select New and
pressW to confirm.
X Enter the name of the category. Proceed as
described under "Entering characters" in
the "Entering characters in the address and
phone books" section (Y page 31).
X Select the icon and pressW to confirm.
A list with icons appears. You can assign an
icon to the category.
X Select an icon by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
You have created a new category with a
name and icon. This category appears
when selecting the display on the map or
when selecting the destination.
X To rename a category or to change an
icon: select Rename or Change Icon and
pressW to confirm.
X Proceed as described under "To create a
new category".
Personal points of interest 73
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X To delete a category: select Delete and
pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the
category should be deleted.
i If you delete a category, all points of interest of this category are also deleted.
X Select Yes and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the category will be
deleted.
If you select No, the process will be
canceled.
Managing personal points of interest
X Select Manage Personal POIs in the
menu and pressW to confirm.
X Select Not Classified, COMAND or your
own category and pressW to confirm.
X Select a personal point of interest and
pressW to confirm. The personal point of interest is displayed.
The following functions are described in the
"Select as destination" section
(Y page 75):
Rrenaming
Rchanging the category
Rdeleting
Saving personal points of interest
There are three ways to save personal points
of interest. You must insert an SD memory
card to do so. The No Memory Cardmessage
otherwise appears.
i Personal points of interest and routes are written to thememory card in a data format
based upon open format GPX (GPS
Exchange Format). Geodata is saved in this
format.
Option 1
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).
X Hide the menu (Y page 51) to display the
map in full screen mode.
X PressW the COMAND controller for longer than two seconds.
The current position of the vehicle is saved
as a personal point of interest on the SD
memory card in the "Unclassified"
category.
i The crosshair position is saved while scrolling the map (Y page 61).
Option 2
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 61).
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Save Position As Personal
POI or Save Crosshair Pos. As
Personal POI ("Move map" function
active) and pressW to confirm. The list of personal categories appears.
X Select a category and pressW to confirm.
X Name for the personal point of interest.
Proceed as described under "Entering
characters" in the "Entering characters in
the address and phone books" section
(Y page 31).
Option 3
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).
X Select Save from the address entry menu
and pressW to confirm.
X Select Save As Personal POI and press
W to confirm.
X Select a category.
X Enter the name.
The current address is saved as a personal
point of interest on the SD memory card.
74 Personal points of interest N a v ig a t io n
Selecting as the destination
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select From Personal POIs and press
W to confirm. A list with the categories for personal
points of interest appears.
X Select an entry and pressW to confirm.
Selection Explanation
Not
Classified
Standard entry for
personal points of
interest.
COMAND This function is not
available in the USA and
Canada.
Coffee Shops Icon and category that
you have created yourself
(Y page 73).
In the example, the Coffee Shops category
has been selected.
The personal points of interest for this
category are shown.
X Select a personal point of interest and
pressW to confirm.
X To rename a personal point of interest:
select Rename and pressW to confirm.
X To change the category: select Change
Category and pressW to confirm.
X To change to the map: select Map and
pressW to confirm. The position of the personal point of
interest is shown in the map.
i An icon is displayed according to the "Displaying personal points of interest on
the map" setting (Y page 72).
X To start route calculation: select Start
and pressW to confirm. If route guidance has been activated, a
prompt will appear asking whether you
wish to accept the personal point of
interest as the destination.
Personal points of interest 75
N a v ig a t io n
Z
If route guidance has not been activated,
route calculation for the personal point of
interest will start immediately.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the personal point of
interest is accepted as the destination.
If you select No, the process will be
canceled.
X To make a call: select Call and pressW to confirm. COMAND switches to
telephone mode (Y page 122).
i This menu item is available if the personal point of interest has a telephone number
and if a mobile phone is connected to
COMAND (Y page 116).
X To delete a personal point of interest:
select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the point of interest.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the personal point of
interest is deleted.
If you select No, the process will be
canceled.
Search & Send
Notes
i To use Search & Send, your vehicle needs to be equipped with mbrace, a navigation
system and a valid mbrace subscription.
Search & Send is a service assisting you in
entering destinations for the navigation
system. This mbrace service can send a
destination address directly from the Google
Maps website to the navigation system of
your vehicle.
Selecting and sending a destination
address
i Please observe the notes on entering an address on themaps.google.com
website.
X Call up themaps.google.comwebsite and
destination address in the address entry
field.
X Click the corresponding button to send the
destination address to the e-mail address
registered with mbrace.
X Enter the e-mail address you specified
when setting up your mbrace account into
the corresponding field in the "Send" dialog
window.
X Click "Send".
Calling up a destination address
X Press thembrace information button
to start downloading the destination
address onto the navigation system of your
vehicle.
i If you have sent more than one destination address to your vehicle's
navigation system, you will need to call up
the information individually for every
address to be downloaded.
X Select Yeswhen the prompt for starting the
navigation system is shown. The window
for starting the navigation system appears
(Y page 57).
76 Search & Send N a v ig a t io n
X Select Start.
or
X Select No to store the downloaded
destination in the destination memory for
later use.
i The destination addresses are downloaded in the same order as they are
sent. If you own several Mercedes-Benz
vehicles equipped with an mbrace
subscriber account, each destination
address can be downloaded by each
vehicle associated with the e-mail address
registered for your mbrace account.
Route guidance
General information
G WARNING
COMAND calculates the route to the
destination without taking into account the
following, for example:
RTraffic lights
RStop and right-of-way signs
RLane merging
RParking or stopping prohibited areas
ROther road and traffic rules and regulations
RNarrow bridges
COMAND may give incorrect navigation
commands if the data in the digital map does
not correspond with the actual road/ traffic
situation. For example, if the traffic routing
has been changed or the direction of a one-
way road has been reversed.
For this reason, you must always observe
applicable road and traffic rules and
regulations during your journey. Road and
traffic rules and regulations always have
priority over the navigation commands
generated by the system.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated (Y page 57).
COMAND guides you to your destination by
means of navigation commands in the form
of audible navigation announcements and
route guidance displays.
The route guidance displays can only be seen
if the display is switched to navigation mode.
If you do not follow the navigation
announcements or if you leave the calculated
route, COMAND automatically calculates a
new route to the destination.
If the digital map contains the corresponding
information, the following applies:
Rwhen selecting a route, COMAND tries to
avoid roads that only have limited access,
e.g. roads closed to through traffic and non-
residents.
Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g.
closed on Sundays and public holidays) are
considered for route guidance on days
when they are open. For this purpose, the
relevant times must be correctly stored in
the database.
Route guidance 77
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Change of direction
Introduction
Changes of direction have three phases:
RPreparation phase
RAnnouncement phase
RChange-of-direction phase
Preparation phase
COMAND prepares you for the upcoming
change of direction. Based on the example
display below, the change of direction is
announced with the Prepare to turn
rightmessage. You see the full-screen map.
Example display: preparation phase
: Next road
; Point at which the change of direction
takes place (light blue dot)
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the
triangle indicates the vehicles direction
of travel)
? Current road
Display? depends on the setting selected
for "Information in map" (Y page 102).
Announcement phase
COMAND announces the imminent change of
direction. Based on the example display
below, the change of direction is announced
with the Please turn right in 500 ft.
and follow the
The announced distance to the next change
of direction depends on the type of road and
its permissible speed limit.
The display is now split into two sectors. In
the left half, you see the normal map view.
The right half shows an enlarged section of
the area around the intersection (Crossing
Zoom) or a 3D image of the road's coursewith
the route indicating the next maneuver.
Example display: announcement phase
: Next road
; Change of direction (turn right here)
= Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
? Distance to the next change of direction
A Route (highlighted in blue, shown in both
the left and right displays)
B Point at which the change of direction
takes place (light blue dot, shown in both
the left and right displays)
i The filled-in section of visual display for distance= gets shorter the nearer you get
to the announced change of direction.
Change-of-direction phase
COMAND announces the imminent change of
direction. In the example, the Now turn
right announcement is made 150 ft. before
the change of direction.
The display is split into two halves, as in the
announcement phase.
78 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n
Example display: change-of-direction phase
: Current vehicle position (the tip of the
triangle indicates the vehicles direction
of travel)
; Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
= Distance to the next change of direction
Once the change of direction is completed,
COMAND automatically switches back to full-
screen display.
Example of a display without changes
of direction
: Route (highlighted in blue)
; Current vehicle position
= Current road
? Map orientation selected
A Map scale selected
Lane recommendations
Overview
On multilane roads, COMAND can display
lane recommendations for the next change of
direction. The corresponding data must be
available in the digital map.
COMAND displays lane recommendations
B based on the next two changes of
direction. The number of lanes applies to the
point at which the next change of direction is
required.
Example display
: Point of the next change in direction (light
blue circle)
; Point of the change of direction after next
= Next change of direction (in this case, turn
off to the right)
? Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
A Distance to the next change of direction
B Possible lane (light blue)
C Recommended lane (dark blue)
D Lane not recommended (gray)
E Current vehicle position: the tip of the
triangle indicates the vehicles direction
of travel
Route guidance 79
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Display and description of lane recommendations
The colors used in the lane recommendation display vary depending on whether day or night
design is switched on.
Lane Day design Night design
Recommended laneC
In this lane, you will be able to complete the
next two changes of direction without
changing lanes.
Dark blue Light blue
Possible laneB
In this lane, you will only be able to complete
the next change of direction without
changing lanes.
Light blue Dark blue
Lane not recommendedD
In this lane, you will not be able to complete
the next change of direction without
changing lanes.
Gray Gray
HOV or carpool lanes
A route may be calculated taking the use of
HOV or carpool lanes into account. You can
use HOV or carpool lanes depending on the
number of persons in the vehicle as well as
the local and time limitation conditions.
i This information is stored in themap data.
i You can enter the number of persons in the vehicle (Y page 53). In this section, you
can also find more information on HOV or
carpool lanes.
When the system guides you onto or away
from HOV or carpool lanes, COMAND issues
visual and acoustic driving instructions.
: HOV symbol on the road sign
; HOV symbol on the car pool lane
Announcing street names
If the function is switched on, the name of the
street which you are turning into is
announced.
Announcements are not made in these
languages in all countries. They are made
when relevant street names for the selected
language are available in the database.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
80 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Announce Street Names and press
W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, the
function is switched onO or off.
Canceling or continuing route
guidance
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X To cancel route guidance: select Cancel
Route Guidance and pressW to confirm.
or
X To continue route guidance: select
Continue Route Guidance and pressW to confirm.
COMAND calculates the route.
Destination or area of destination
reached
When you reach your destination, COMAND
displays a checkered flag and route guidance
is automatically ended.
If the destination is not in close proximity to
a digitized street, the Area of
destination reached message appears
when the destination is reached.
Navigation announcements
Repeating navigation announcements
G WARNING
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of
consulting the map display for directions.
Consulting the symbols or map display for
directions may cause you to divert your
attention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident.
i Audible navigation announcements are muted during a telephone call.
If you havemissed an announcement, you can
call up the current announcement at any
time.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select RPT in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
Switching navigation announcements
on/off
X To switch off: press the8 button
during an announcement.
You will briefly see the message: The
driving instructions have been
muted.
X To switch on: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select RPT in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
i COMAND automatically switches the
navigation announcements back on when:
Ryou have a new route calculated.
Ryou switch COMAND back on again or
start the engine.
Route guidance 81
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Reducing volume during a navigation
announcement
The volume of an active audio or video source
can be automatically reduced during a
navigation announcement.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Audio Fadeout and pressW to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, the
function is switched onO or off.
Setting the volume manually
X Adjust the volume using theq control knob during a navigation announcement.
or
X Select RPT on the map display when the
menu is shown, and set the volumewith the
q control knob.
Avoiding a section of the route
blocked by a traffic jam
This function blocks a section of the route
ahead of you. You can set the length of the
blocked route section. If possible, COMAND
calculates a detour around the blocked
section of the route.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Detour and pressW to confirm.
X To block a section of the route: select
Longer or Shorter repeatedly and confirm
usingW until the desired section has been selected.
i The total length of the section that can be blocked is defined by the digital map. The
menu items are available accordingly.
X To start route calculation: select Start
and pressW to confirm.
X To delete the blocked section: select
Delete while the message is shown and
pressW to confirm. COMAND calculates the route without the
block.
Selecting an alternative route
Introduction
With the "Alternative route" function, routes
other than the original one can be calculated.
Option 1
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Alternative Route and pressW to confirm.
On the right-hand side, you will see
information on the currently selected
alternative route, e.g. distance, estimated
remaining driving time and estimated time
of arrival. Route sections used (e.g.
freeways, tunnels) are displayed as
symbols.
82 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n
Example: route 1
The route is shown in themapwith a dark blue
line.
Routes 1 to 3 are calculated with the current
settings for the route type and route options
(Y page 52). Route 4 is the economic route
(eco route).
Route 4 (example: eco route)
The eco route is shown on the alternative
route map with a green line.
Option 2
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Calculate Alternative Routes
and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status, the
function is switched onO or off.
Function is activated: alternative routes
are calculated directly after the destination
is entered.
Menu functions
X To select the next or previous
alternative route: select Next or
Previous and pressW to confirm.
X To start route guidance using the
selected alternative route: select Start
and pressW to confirm. COMAND starts route guidance on the
chosen alternative route.
Displaying destination information
You can display destination information for
the destination, for both waypoints and for
the intermediate stop, if they are part of the
route.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Destination Information and
pressW to confirm. Destination information is displayed.
Example: destination information
Route guidance 83
N a v ig a t io n
Z
The example shows:
Rthe destinationO
Rtwo waypoints
Rthe relevant information on distance,
estimated time of arrival and estimated
remaining driving time
i If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND (Y page 116) and a phone
number is included in the destination
information, you can call it.
X To call up further destination
information: turn cVd the COMAND controller.
X To close the destination information:
slide XVY the COMAND controller or press thek button.
Route overview
You can use the route overview tomove along
the active route section by section and view
information and details about each section of
the route.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Route Browser and pressW to confirm.
At the top of the display, you will see
information about the highlighted route
section, for example the distance to be driven
on the road and road designation. The
highlighted route section is marked in white
with a red border on the map.
X To view the next or previous route
section: select Next or Previous and
pressW to confirm.
i If the first or last route section is highlighted, you cannot select Previous or
Next.
X To zoom in or out of the map: selectN orM and pressW to confirm.
X To close the route overview: select
Back and pressW to confirm.
Route display
You can see the route before starting your
journey. This function is only available when
the vehicle is stationary.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Route Demonstration and press
W to confirm. The map with the crosshair appears.
X To get to the destination: pressW to confirm the highlighted symbol.
X To stop the route display: confirm the
symbol by pressingW.
84 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n
Example: route display stopped
: Road name and city display when route
display has been stopped
; Distance of the crosshair from current
vehicle position
X To get to the current vehicle position:
pressW to confirm the symbol for the current vehicle position.
X To change the map scale: select Scale
and pressW to confirm. The scale bar appears.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Recording the route
Notes
If you have activated COMAND and the SD
memory card has been inserted, you should
not take it out of the slot.
When you record a route, COMAND uses so-
called support points and displays the route
as a series of lines. If the route is then
calculated, COMAND attempts to align the
recorded route with the digital map.
The support points of the route may not be on
a digitized road.
This is often the case for routes that have
been calculated using map data from other
sources.
Calling up the Routes menu
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select Record Routes.
Starting/ending recording
X To start recording: select Start
Recording in the Routes menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. During the recording, the recorded route is
shown behind the current vehicle position
with gray strokes (symbol for tire tracks).
X To end recording: select Stop
Recording in the Routes menu by turning
Route guidance 85
N a v ig a t io n
Z
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Displaying and editing the recorded
route
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).
X Select List in the Routes menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Previously recorded routes are displayed.
X Select a route and pressW to confirm. The map appears with a menu. The
recorded route is shown in the map with a
blue dotted line.
Turning off from the route on the map
X Select Demo by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The map with the crosshair appears.
X Proceed as described in the "Route
demonstration" section (Y page 84).
Starting route calculation
X Select Start in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
COMAND attempts to align the recorded
route with the digital map.
Editing the route
You can change the route name and the icon.
X Select Edit in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X To change the route name: select
Rename and pressW to confirm.
i The name cannot be changed while the vehicle is in motion.
X To change the icon: select Change Icon
and pressW to confirm.
X A description for both entries can be found
in the "Personal POIs" section under
"Managing categories for personal POIs"
(Y page 73).
Changing direction for route calculation
You can set the icon for the route to the
starting point or to the destination, thereby
changing the direction for route calculation.
i During route calculation, one-way streets or turn restrictions, for example, are taken
into account. Therefore, the outward and
return routes may differ from each other.
86 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n
X Select Swap in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Deleting the route
X Select Delete in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A prompt appears askingwhether the route
should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the route will be deleted.
If you select No, the process will be
canceled.
Scanning the memory
The SD memory card is inserted.
X Select Memory in the Routes menu
(Y page 85) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The route memory is displayed.
Off-road and off-map
Important safety note
G WARNING
The COMAND navigation system may direct
you to off-road routes that your vehicle may
not be capable of traversing through without
damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is
the driver's sole responsibility to determine
the suitability of the route. Off-road routes
may be of varying conditions and their
appropriateness for use may be affected by
various factors such as time of day, time of
year and immediate weather conditions that
cannot be judged or taken into consideration
by the COMAND system.
Route guidance to a destination that is
not on a digitized road
COMAND can guide you to destinations
which are within the area covered by the
digital map, but which are not themselves
recorded on the map.
These destinations are known as off-road
destinations, which you can enter using the
map, for example. In these cases, COMAND
guides you for as long as possible with
navigation announcements and displays on
roads known to the system.
Example: route guidance to an off-road destination
: Off-road destination
; Off-road route section (dashed blue)
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the
triangle indicates the vehicles direction
of travel)
? Off-road (if available)
If the vehicle reaches an areawhich is not part
of the digital map, the display appears as a
split-screen view. On the right-hand side, an
arrow appears which points to off-road
destination:. You will hear the
announcement: "Please follow the arrow on
the display". As the vehicle approaches the
destination, the Area of destination
reached message appears.
Route guidance 87
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Route guidance from an off-road
location to a destination
If the vehicle position is within the area
covered by the digital map, but the map does
not contain any information about that
location, the vehicle is in an off-road location.
COMAND is also able to guide you to a
destination even from an off-road location.
At the start of the route guidance, you will see
the Off Mapped Road message, an arrow
and the distance to the destination. The arrow
shows the compass heading to the actual
destination.
The route is highlighted blue, starting from
the last recognized street the vehicle was on
before it left the map.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system, route guidance
continues in the usual way.
Route guidance from an off-map
location to a destination
If the vehicle position is outside the area
covered by the digital map, then the vehicle
is in an off-map location. COMAND is also
able to guide you to a destination even from
an off-map location.
At the start of the route guidance, you will see
the Off Mapped Road message, an arrow
and the distance to the destination. The
direction arrow shows the compass heading
to the destination.
The route is highlighted blue from the nearest
road known to the system.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system, route guidance
continues in the usual way.
Off-road during route guidance
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be
differences between the data on the digital
map and the actual course of the road.
In such cases, the system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle position on the
digital map and thus considers the vehicle to
be in an off-road position.
In the display, you will see the Off Mapped
Road message, an arrow and the distance to
the destination. The direction arrow shows
the compass heading to the destination.
As soon as the system can assign the vehicle
position to the map again, route guidance
continues in the usual way.
Traffic reports
Conditions
To receive real-time traffic reports via
satellite radio, you require:
Roptionally available satellite radio
equipment
Ra subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio
Traffic Message Service
Further information on satellite radio is
available in the "Satellite radio" section
(Y page 148).
COMAND can receive traffic reports via
satellite radio and take account of these for
route guidance in the navigation system.
Received traffic reports are displayed in the
map either as text or as icons.
Real-time traffic reports in the map
COMAND can show certain traffic incidents
on the map. Traffic reports are shown on the
map at scales of 0.05 mi to 20 mi.
X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full Screen
menu item is shown, pressW to confirm. The map can be seen in the full-screen
display.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller until the desired map scale is set.
88 Traffic reports N a v ig a t io n
1 Icon delimiting the section of the route
affected
2 Icon indicating an incident on the route
(traffic flow)
3 Destination
4 Map scale
Traffic reports 89
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Icon for real-time traffic reports
Icon Description Traffic reports in the map display List of
traffic
reports
Traffic
reports
Warning
(red)
This appears at the beginning of the
affected route section if route
guidance is active and the route leads
through an affected area.
Entry type:
warning
Entry
type:
warning
Traffic
incident
(yellow)
This appears at the beginning of the
affected route section if route
guidance is active and the route leads
through an area affected by a traffic
incident.
Entry type:
caution
Entry
type:
caution
Traffic jam
on route
(stop-and-go
traffic)
This appears at the beginning of a
traffic jam (average speed
25 45 mph) if route guidance is
active and the route leads through an
area of congested traffic.
Yellow car icons may appear in
conjunction with this icon.
Entry type:
traffic jam
on route
(stop-and-
go traffic)
Entry
type:
traffic jam
on route
(stop-and-
go traffic)
Traffic jam
on the route
This appears at the beginning of a
traffic jam (average speed
5 20 mph) if route guidance is active
and the route leads through an area of
congested traffic.
Red car icons may appear in
conjunction with this icon.
Entry type:
traffic jam
on route
Entry
type:
traffic jam
on route
Blocked
route section
on the route
Appears at the beginning of a blocked
route section if route guidance is
active and the route leads through the
blocked section.
The XXXX icons may appear in
conjunction with this icon.
Entry type:
blocked
route
section
Entry
type:
blocked
route
section
Yellow
line with
arrows
Traffic
incidents
Possible delays (e.g. roadworks)
Appears on the side of the road
affected (direction of travel)
(Not
available)
(Not
available)
90 Traffic reports N a v ig a t io n
Icon Description Traffic reports in the map display List of
traffic
reports
Traffic
reports
Green
line with
arrows
Unimpeded
traffic flow
No delays
Only appears on the side of the road
(direction of travel) on which traffic
flow is unimpeded
(Not
available)
(Not
available)
Red line
with
arrows
Warning
message
Incident on road
Appears on the side of the road
affected (direction of travel)
(Not
available)
(Not
available)
Displaying real-time traffic reports
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Traffic by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
If the dialog field shows the No Traffic
Messages message, this means that:
Rno traffic reports have been received yet.
Rno traffic reports are available.
X To cancel the search: select Cancel and
pressW to confirm.
X To close the report window: select OK
and pressW to confirm.
If traffic reports exist, a list is shown.
The content of the list varies depending on
whether route guidance is active or not.
List when route guidance is not active
The list shows all the roads, areas or regions
for which reports are available.
A traffic report may refer to an area or a
region, e.g. if visibility is impaired due to fog.
X To read a traffic report: select a road,
area or region by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
List when route guidance is active
The first list shows the roads, areas and
regions that lie along the route and for which
traffic reports are available.
Traffic reports 91
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X Show all messages: select All
Messages by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You see a list of all roads, areas and regions
for which traffic reports are available, even
if the reports do not affect your route.
X To show a traffic report: select a road,
area or region and pressW to confirm.
X To close the list: slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Example: traffic report
1 Depending on your selection: Messages
On Route or All Messages
2 Report 8 of 16 for the road affected
3 Report text
4 Road, area or region affected by traffic
reports
5 Icon for state/province
6 Icon for report type, e.g. traffic flow
message
X To scroll within a report or to access
the next report: turn cVd the COMAND controller.
X To return to the report: slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Displaying traffic reports on the map
X Select Traffic Symbol Information by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Traffic symbol information on the map (example)
: Affected roads with indication of direction
; Icon for report type, e.g. traffic flow
message
X Select Next or Previous by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm in order to continue highlighting
traffic icons.
X To change the map scale: select Map by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You can now zoom in or out of the map.
X To show the detailed view: select
Details and pressW to confirm.
92 Traffic reports N a v ig a t io n
Details on traffic symbol information (example)
X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Reading out traffic reports on the
route
Introduction
The read-aloud function is only availablewhile
route guidance is active. It reads out traffic
reports affecting the current route. You can
set the language (Y page 45) and the text
reader speed (Y page 42).
You can start the text reader function
manually or set it to automatic.
Starting the text reader function
manually
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select TMC by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Read out all messages on
route and pressW to confirm.
COMAND reads out the reports in sequence.
i If there are no reports for the route, the Read out all messages on routemenu
item is shown in gray and cannot be
selected.
X To switch off the read-aloud function:
select Cancel Read-Aloud Function and
pressW to confirm or press the8 button.
COMAND reads the current report aloud
and then exits the read-aloud function.
Automatic read-aloud function
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Read Traffic Messages
Automatically and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch
the option onO or off.
Recalculating the route dynamically
The route types Dynamic Route and
Dynamic Route Only After
Request(Y page 52) take all relevant traffic
messages into account when calculating a
route.
If you have set the route type Dynamic
Route, COMAND guides you on the updated
route to your destination.
If you have set the route type Dynamic
Route Only After Request, a prompt
appears. You can decide whether to accept
the route suggested by COMAND, or continue
with the original route.
Traffic reports 93
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X To accept the suggested route: press
W the COMAND controller.
X To continue along the original route:
select Reject by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Destination memory
Home address (My address)
Entering the home address via address
entry
X Initially proceed as described in the
"Adopting an address book entry as a home
address" and confirm My Address by
pressingW.
X To enter the home address for the first
time: confirm New Entry by pressingW.
X To change the home address: select
Change in the menu showing the home
address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Confirm New Entry by pressingW.
X In both cases, enter the home address as a
destination, e.g. as a city, street and house
number (Y page 54). Then, save the home
address (Y page 57).
Adopting an address book entry as a
home address
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select From Memory and pressW to confirm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2).
Option 1: destination memory list with
character bar
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the destination memory
list appears as a selection list.
Option 2: destination memory list as
selection list
The My Address entry is listed as the first
entry in the destination memory.
X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
94 Destination memory N a v ig a t io n
i If you have not yet entered any characters, the My Address entry is
automatically highlighted in the selection
list.
If no home address has been stored yet, you
can now assign an address book entry. If a
home address already exists, it is displayed
and you can alter it.
i If you select New Entry, you are also offered the option of entering the home
address for the first time. You can then
save the home address without having to
start route guidance.
X To enter the home address for the first
time: select Assign to Address Book
Entry and pressW to confirm.
X Choose Home, Work or Not Classified
and pressW to confirm.
X To change the home address: select
Change and pressW to confirm.
X Select Assign to Address Book Entry
and pressW to confirm.
i If you select New Entry, you are also offered the option of changing the home
address by entering an address. You can
then save the home address without having
to start route guidance.
X Choose Home, Work or Not Classified
and pressW to confirm. In both cases, youwill see the address book
either with the character bar or as a
selection list.
X To select an address book entry:
proceed as described in the "Searching for
an address book entry" section
(Y page 136).
X To confirm the selection: pressW the COMAND controller.
If no home address has been stored,
COMAND saves the entry. You will see a
message and then the address menu with
the selected address. Start is highlighted
automatically.
If a home address has already been stored,
you will see a prompt asking you whether
the My Address entry should be
overwritten.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND overwrites the
destination. You will see a message and
then the address menu with the selected
address. Start is highlighted
automatically.
If you select No, the list will appear again.
Selecting the home address for route
guidance
X Proceed as described in the "Selecting a
destination from the destination memory"
section (Y page 60).
Storing a destination in the
destination memory
Notes
This function also stores the destination in
the address book.
When the address book is full, no destinations
can be saved in the destination memory. You
must first delete address book entries
(Y page 137).
After destination entry
X The destination has been entered and is
shown in the address entry menu
(Y page 57).
X Select Save by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can now select storage options
(Y page 96).
During route guidance
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
Destination memory 95
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select Save Destination and pressW to confirm.
You can now select storage options
(Y page 96).
From the list of previous destinations
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select From Last Destinations and
pressW to confirm. The list of last destinations appears.
X Select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The destination address is shown.
X Select Save and pressW to confirm. You can now select storage options.
Selecting storing options
X To save the destination without a
name: select Save Without Name and
pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the destination in the
destination memory and uses the address
as the destination name.
X To save the destination as My
Address: select Save as "My Address"
and pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the destination in the
destination memory as My Address. If the
selected address book entry already
contains address data that can be used for
navigation (L icon), a prompt will appear
asking whether you wish to overwrite the
existing data.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry is overwritten.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
X To save the destination with a name:
select Save With Name and pressW to confirm.
X Select a category, e.g. Home, and pressW to confirm.
The input menu appears with data fields
and the character bar.
Example: saving a destination with a name
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
X Proceed as described under "Entering
characters using the character bar" in the
"Entering characters in navigation mode
(entering a city)" section (Y page 31).
X Then, select and pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the destination under the
name entered.
Assigning a destination to an address
book entry
An address with complete address data that
is suitable for navigation can be assigned to
a pre-existing address book entry. You can
then later start route guidance to this address
straight from the address book
(Y page 139).
X Select Assign to Address Book Entry
and pressW to confirm.
96 Destination memory N a v ig a t io n
X Select a category, e.g. Home, and pressW to confirm.
You will see the address book either with
the character bar or as a selection list.
X To select an address book entry:
proceed as described in the "Searching for
an address book entry" section
(Y page 136).
COMAND stores the data if the address
book entry selected does not yet contain
navigable address data.
If the selected address book entry already
contains navigable address data, a prompt
will appear asking whether you wish to
overwrite the existing data.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND stores the data.
Deleting a destination or the home
address from the destinationmemory
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select From Memory and pressW to confirm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2).
X Option 1: destination memory list with
character bar: proceed as described in the
"Entering characters using the character
bar" section (Y page 31).
X Option 2: destination memory list as
selection list: select a destination by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You see the address data of the selected
entry.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the destination.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the
destination. You will see a message to this
effect.
If you select No, the process will be
canceled.
i If the navigable address data for the destination being deleted is also assigned
to an address book entry, COMAND will
also delete this data from there. If the
corresponding address book entry does
not contain any further data, such as
telephone numbers, COMAND deletes the
entire address book entry.
Previous destinations
Introduction
COMAND automatically stores the previous
destinations for which the route calculation
has been started. If the memory is full,
COMAND deletes the oldest destination. You
can also save a destination from the list of
previous destinations in the destination
memory. It will be stored there permanently.
Storing a destination permanently in
the destination memory
X Proceed as described in the "From the list
of previous destinations" section
(Y page 96).
Previous destinations 97
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Storing the vehicle position in the list
of previous destinations
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Save vehicle position and press
W to confirm. COMAND stores the current vehicle
position as a destination in the list of
previous destinations.
Storing the crosshair position in the
list of previous destinations
A crosshair appears on the map if you have
moved the map manually. You can store the
crosshair position as a destination in the list
of previous destinations.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Save crosshair position and
pressW to confirm.
Deleting one of the previous
destinations
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation
system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.
X Select From last destinations and
pressW to confirm. The list of last destinations appears.
X Select the desired destination and press
W to confirm. The destination address appears.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
Map operation and settings
Note
Company logos displayed on the map are
trademarks of the respective companies and
used solely for the purpose of indicating the
location of these companies. The use of such
logos on the map does not indicate approval
of, support of or advertising by these
companies for the navigation system itself.
Setting the map scale
X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full Screen
menu item is shown, pressW.
X To call up the scale bar: as soon as you
turn cVd the COMAND controller, scale bar= appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
98 Map operation and settings N a v ig a t io n
: Set map scale as a number with unit
; Currently set map scale as indicated by
the needle on the scale bar
= Map scale
Unit of measurement: in the COMAND
display depends on the selectionmade for the
instrument cluster (see the vehicle
Operator's Manual).
Moving the map
Showing the crosshair
X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full Screen
menu item is shown, pressW.
X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller. A crosshair appears on themap. If you slide
it again, the map moves in the
corresponding direction under the
crosshair.
Map with crosshair
: Current vehicle position
; Crosshair
= Details of the crosshair position
? Map scale selected
Display= may be the name of a street, for
example, provided the digital map contains
the necessary data. Alternatively, it may show
the geo-coordinate position of the crosshair
if the Geo-coordinates display is switched
on (Y page 102).
Hiding the crosshair and centering the
map on the vehicle position or
destination
X Press the% back button twice.
The crosshair disappears and the map is
set to the vehicle position.
or
X Set the map to the vehicle position; see the
explanation below.
Centering the map on the vehicle or
destination position
Centering the map on the vehicle
position
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Vehicle Position Map and press
W to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown, press the% back button.
This hides the crosshair.
Centering on the destination
This function requires that a route to a
destination has been calculated. If the route
includes waypoints and an intermediate stop,
the map can also be set to these positions.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by slidingV and turning cVd
Map operation and settings 99
N a v ig a t io n
Z
the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Destination Position Map and
pressW to confirm. The crosshair position is set to the relevant
destination.
Map settings
Calling up the map settings menu
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Setting the map orientation
Map orientation
: Current map orientation
The following display modes are possible:
R0 North orientation (the map view is displayed so that north is always up).
ROrientation in the direction of travel (the
map is displayed so that the direction of
travel is always up; the orange point of the
icon points north).
R Bird's-eye view (the map is displayed so
that the direction of travel is always up; the
map projection reproduces the curvature
of the earth and the orange point of the icon
points north).
R 3D map (the map is displayed so that
the heading is always up; from a scale of
1 km the map displays elevation; the
orange point of the icon points north).
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
X Select Map Orientation and pressW to confirm.
A# dot indicates the current setting.
Map orientation menu
X Select North Up, Heading Up, Bird's-
eye View or 3-D Map by turning cVd the
100 Map operation and settings N a v ig a t io n
COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
A# dot indicates the new setting.
Setting thepoint of interest icons on the
map
You can set the points of interest you wish to
have displayed as symbols on themap. Points
of interest are, for example, gas stations,
hotels, cinemas and restaurants.
The following settings are possible:
RStandard Symbols
Symbol display determined by the factory
settings.
RPersonal Symbols
You can determine the symbols yourself.
RNo Symbols
The map does not show any symbols.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
X Select POI Symbols On Map and press
W to confirm.
X Select Standard Symbols, Personal
Symbols or No Symbols.
If you select Personal Symbols, the list of
points of interest appears.
X To switch the symbol display on/off:
select a point of interest by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Depending on the previous state of the
symbols, they will either be shownO or hidden. You can switch on the symbol displays formore than one point of interest.
X To switch all personal symbols on/off:
select All and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state of the
personal symbols, they will either be shown
O or hidden.
If the function is switched onO, the individual points of interest are grayed out
and the previously selected settings remain
unchanged.
If the function is switched off, you can re-select the individual points of interest.
They show the most recently selected
settings.
i The list shows all symbols that are contained on the digital map across all
countries. However, not all points of
interest are available in all countries. As a
result, certain point of interest symbols
may not be displayed on the map, even if
the symbol display is switched on.
X To exit the menu: press the% back
button.
Map operation and settings 101
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Map information in the display
During route guidance, you can have map
information shown at the bottom edge of the
display.
Showing text information
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
X Select Text Information On Map and
pressW to confirm. A# dot indicates the current setting.
X Select Arrival Time / Distance,
Current Street, Geo-coordinates or
None and pressW to confirm.
X To exit themenu: slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Arrival time/distance to the destination
Arrival time/distance display switched on
: Icon for destination
; Distance to the destination
= Icon for estimated time of arrival
? Estimated time of arrival
You can only see this display during route
guidance. While scrolling the map
(Y page 61), you will see additional data, e.g.
road names, depending on the crosshair
position, if the digital map supports this data.
i During route calculation, or if the vehicle is traveling on a non-digitized road, the
linear distance to the destination is shown.
In this case, the display will be grayed out.
Road display
Road display active
: Road names or numbers, e.g. for freeways
Geo-coordinate display
Geo-coordinate display active
: Current height above average sea level
(rounded)
; Current vehicle position: latitude
coordinates
= Current vehicle position: longitude
coordinates
? Number of GPS satellites currently being
used
There must be sufficient GPS reception for all
displays to be shown. If this is not the case,
the display will be grayed out. Height
display: may vary from the actual value,
because the navigation system uses the GPS
signals for the calculation.
102 Map operation and settings N a v ig a t io n
While scrolling the map (Y page 61), you will
see the geo-coordinates of the crosshair
position. Height display: and number of
satellites used? are not displayed.
"None" menu option
Display switched off
: Current map orientation
i During the "Move map" function you can see additional information depending on
the position of the crosshair, such as a road
name, if the digital map supports this data.
Switching the topographical map on/
off
The topographical map uses different colors
to depict elevation. The color key generally
reflects the topography's dominant
vegetation or the ground's perceived color
when seen from the air, for example:
Rgreen (grass) for lowland
Ryellow, brown (woodland) for hills
Rgray (stone) and white (snow) for
mountains.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
X Select Topographic Map and pressW to confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
the option onO or off.
Freeway information
When driving on freeways, you can have the
nearest gas stations, rest areas, etc., as well
as your current distance from them, shown
on the right-hand side of the display.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
X Select Highway Information and press
W to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch
the option onO or off.
Example: freeway information
The entries show the number of the freeway
and freeway exits as well as their distance
from the vehicle's current position.
Switching the city model on/off
When the city model is switched on, the map
shows buildings as 3D models.
i The city model is only shown for "Bird's- eye view" or "3D map".
It is available for map scales 50 m and
100 m.
Map operation and settings 103
N a v ig a t io n
Z
The data required for displaying buildings
is not available for all cities.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
X Select City (3D) and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch
the option onO or off.
Example: city model
Showing/hiding intersecting streets
If route guidance is inactive, intersecting
streets can be shown on the upper edge of
the display.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
X Select Next Intersecting Street and
pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch
the option onO or off.
Intersecting street (example: city route)
Intersecting street (example: freeway route)
Coordinates on the map
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
X Select Compass On Map and pressW to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Never, When Off-Road or When
Route Guidance Inactive and pressW to confirm.
The selected setting is accepted.
104 Map operation and settings N a v ig a t io n
Traffic information on the map
If you subscribe to the SIRIUS XM Satellite
Radio Traffic Message Service, traffic
information can be displayed on themap. You
can select three categories for the display.
X To switch the displays on/off: pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X SelectTraffic Information On Map and
pressW to confirm.
X Select Incidents and/or Speed & Flow
and/or Free Flow and pressW to confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
the option onO or off.
Traffic information Display on themap
Traffic incidents Road sections are
illustrated with a
yellow line and
arrows=.
Speed & Flow Road sections are
illustrated with
yellow or red car
icons:.
Yellow car icons:
traffic jam; average
speed 25 45 mph
Red car icons: traffic
jam; average speed
5 20 mph
Free Flow Road sections are
illustrated with a
green line and
arrows;.
: Speed & Flow
; Free Flow
= Traffic incidents
Additional settings
Avoiding an area
General information
COMAND makes it possible to avoid areas
you do not wish to drive through.
The calculated route may include an area to
be avoided if:
Ryour destination is located in such an area.
Rthe route uses roads that lead through an
area to be avoided.
i Highwayswithin blocked areas are always taken into consideration in the route
calculation.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Avoid Area and pressW to confirm.
If you have not yet set an area to be
avoided, a menu appears (option 1).
If you have already set one or more areas
to be avoided, a list appears (option 2).
Additional settings 105
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Option 1: the menu appears
X Select Using Map, From Memory or From
Personal POIs and pressW to confirm.
If you select Using Map, the map with the
crosshair appears.
After choosing between From Memory or
From Personal POIs, either the
destination memory (Y page 94) or the list
of categories for personal points of interest
appears (Y page 75).
X Choose the destination or personal point of
interest and pressW to confirm.
X If the destination address is displayed,
select Continue and pressW to confirm. The map appears.
The crosshair marks the center of the area
that is to be avoided.
X To move the map: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller.
X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
cVd the COMANDcontroller, the scale bar appears. Turning clockwise zooms out from
the map; turning counter-clockwise zooms
in.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
X To apply a block: pressW the COMAND controller.
A red square appears on the map.
X To adjust the size of the square: turn
cVd the COMAND controller. The square is enlarged or reduced.
X To confirm the settings: pressW. The list appears. The previously selected
area to be avoided has been added and
activated.
X Follow the instructions listed under "Option
2: the list appears".
Option 2: the list appears
"Avoid area" list (example)
i Available list places are named Area
X Select Avoid New Area by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
A menu appears.
106 Additional settings N a v ig a t io n
X Select Using Map, From Memory or From
Personal POIs and pressW to confirm.
If you select Using Map, the map with the
crosshair appears.
After choosing between From Memory or
From Personal POIs either the
destination memory (Y page 94) or the list
of categories for personal points of interest
appears (Y page 75).
X Choose the destination or personal point of
interest and pressW to confirm.
X If the destination address is displayed,
select Continue and pressW to confirm. The map appears.
X Proceed according to the instructions
under "Option 1: the menu appears" if you
wish to set a new area to be avoided in the
map.
Switching an avoided area on/off
X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The avoided area is switched onO or off depending on the previous status.
Displaying and changing an avoided
area
X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Display / Change and pressW to confirm.
The area to be avoided is indicated in the
map.
X To change the location of the area: slide
the COMAND controller XVY, ZV or aVb. The area is moved on the map.
X To adjust the size of the area: turn
cVd the COMAND controller. The area is enlarged or reduced.
X To confirm the change: pressW the COMAND controller.
The list appears and the change is entered.
Deleting a set area
X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A query appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
SIRIUS XM service
Displaying SIRIUS XM service
information
You can display the SIRIUS XM service
information.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Additional settings 107
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X Select SIRIUS Service and pressW to confirm.
The window on the right half of the display
shows the telephone number of the
provider (SIRIUS XM) and the serial number
of your service module for receiving traffic
messages.
Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic
report service
X Call the traffic report provider's phone
number shown on the screen.
i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS
XM Radio website at
http://www.sirius.com (USA) or
http://www.siriuscanada.com
(Canada).
Once the connection has been established:
X Follow the instructions of the operator.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes.
If registration is not included when
purchasing the system, your credit card
details will be required to activate your
account.
Compass function
In the compass view, you can see the current
direction of travel, the current height above
sea level and the coordinates of the vehicle
position, for example.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
function button.
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Pos. in the navigation systemmenu
bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Compass and pressW to confirm.
Compass (example)
: Current direction of travel
; Current height above average sea level,
rounded
= Current vehicle position: longitude
coordinates
? Number of GPS satellites currently being
used
A Current vehicle position: latitude
coordinates
B Currently set steering angle of the front
wheels
i To display current height;, the system
must be able to receive at least four
satellites. Steering angleB can be a
maximum of 35 in both directions.
X To exit the display: confirm Back by
pressingW or press the% button.
Showing the map data version
X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Map Version and pressW to confirm.
The map data version number is shown.
Information about new versions of the
digital map can be obtained from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
108 Additional settings N a v ig a t io n
Updating the digital map
Introduction
The digital maps generated by the map
software become outdated in the same way
as conventional road maps. Optimal route
guidance can only be provided by
the navigation system in conjunction with the
most up-to-date map software.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the
digital map updated there with a DVD, or you
can update it yourself.
i The update process can take a long time (over an hour), depending on the size of the
digital map. During this time, you will only
be able to switch on radio mode and to
accept incoming calls. The update will be
completed more quickly if the vehicle is
stationary.
If you carry out the update with the engine
switched off and the starter battery has
insufficient power, COMAND may
automatically switch off during the process
in order to protect the battery. If this
occurs, restart the update with the engine
running.
G WARNING
Never leave the engine running in an enclosed
space. The exhaust gases contain carbon
monoxide. Inhaling exhaust gases constitutes
a health hazard and could lead to loss of
consciousness or even death.
Updating process
X Insert the DVD into the DVD changer
(Y page 154).
COMAND checks whether the digital map
on the DVD is compatible with the
navigation system and system software.
A prompt then appears asking if you want
to install the database. Versions of the
database currently installed and the
database that is to be installed are
displayed.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
After selecting Yes, an activation code
must be enteredwhen installing a database
for the first time. You will receive the
activation code when you buy the
navigation DVD.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
X Enter the activation code.
After entering the activation code
correctly, COMAND starts updating the
digital map. Once the update is finished,
you will see a message.
X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.
While the update is running, you will see a
message to this effect and a progress bar. The
navigation system is not operational until the
update is complete.
i You cannot eject the DVD during the update. If you switch off COMAND during
the update, the update is interrupted. It
then continues from where it was
interrupted when the system is restarted.
COMANDmay prompt you to change the DVD
during the update.
X Press theV load/eject button.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.
Additional settings 109
N a v ig a t io n
Z
X Insert the requested DVD.
Once the update has been successfully
completed, you will see a message to this
effect.
X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.
The update is complete.
If the update is not successfully completed,
you will see amessage that themap update
is not possible.
X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.
110 Additional settings N a v ig a t io n
Problems with the navigation system
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
COMAND is unable to
continue route
guidance after the
journey has been
interrupted.
Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more
than two hours.
"Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.
"Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND back on
and driving on.
X Continue route guidance (Y page 81).
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
COMAND is unable to
determine the vehicle's
position.
COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the
vehicle has been transported (e.g. by ferry, by motorail or after
towing).
X Start the vehicle and pull away.
COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the
driving situation, this may take some time.
Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of
the vehicle's position.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with
navigation announcements and route guidance displays.
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The Navigation
Unavailable message
appears.
COMAND has an integrated hard drive on which the digital map is
stored.
To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND
deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation
system will then be temporarily unavailable.
X Let the vehicle and COMAND cool down.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.
If an area of the hard drive has a malfunction, COMAND can no
longer access the map data in this area, for example when
calculating a route.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.
The navigation system will be operational again until it has to
access the faulty area of the hard drive oncemore. Themessage
will then reappear.
X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Problems with the navigation system 111
N a v ig a t io n
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
You see a message
informing you that the
DVD containing the
digital map is
incompatible with the
system software.
The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update.
X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.
X Eject the DVD.
X Have the database checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The map software
update has failed.
The DVD is dirty.
X Clean the DVD.
X Restart the update.
The DVD is scratched.
X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle
interior.
X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.
X Restart the update.
COMAND's integral hard drive is faulty.
X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
COMAND asks for an
activation code during
the map update.
The digital map is secured with an activation code.
X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
112 Problems with the navigation system N a v ig a t io n
COMAND features ............................. 114
General information ......................... 114
Telephony via theBluetooth inter-
face .................................................... 115
Reception and transmission volume 120
Telephone operation ......................... 120
Using the phone book ...................... 125
Using call lists ................................... 129
Using the speed dial list ................... 131
Text message (SMS) ......................... 133
Using the address book ................... 135
113
T e le p h o n e
COMAND features
These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND system at the time of
purchase. Country-specific deviations are
possible. Please note that your COMAND
system may not be equipped with all the
features described.
General information
Introduction
COMAND offers telephony via the
Bluetooth interface.
When connecting a Bluetooth-capable
mobile phonewith PBAP (PhoneBookAccess
Profile), contacts are automatically
downloaded to COMAND.
With a suitablemobile phone, you can use the
hands-free system and receive vCards via the
Bluetooth interface.
You can use the text message (SMS) function
(receiving and reading) if the mobile phone
supports the MAP (Message Access Profile)
Bluetooth profile.
More detailed information on suitable mobile
phones and on connecting with Bluetooth-
capable mobile phones with COMAND can be
found on the Internet at
http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center on
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for
the USA or on 1-800-387-0100 for Canada.
Safety notes
G WARNING
A driver's attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use themobile
phone while driving, please use the handsfree
device and only use the mobile phone when
weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular mobile phone while driving a
vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
G WARNING
Excessive electromagnetic radiation may
constitute a health hazard to yourself and
others.
There is scientific discussion surrounding the
possible health risks posed by
electromagnetic fields. You can reduce this
risk by using an exterior aerial.
Therefore, only use mobile communication
equipment if it is connected to the exterior
aerial of the vehicle.
Call disconnectionwhile the vehicle is
in motion
A call may be disconnected if:
Rthere is insufficient network coverage in
certain areas.
Ryou move from one transmitter/receiver
area (cell) into another and no channels are
free.
Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible
with the network available.
Operating options
You can operate the telephone by:
Rusing the COMAND controller:
turn cVd.
slide XVY or ZV.
114 General information T e le p h o n e
pressW.
Rpressing the6 or~ button and
using the telephone keypad on COMAND
Rpressing the6 or~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel
Rusing the Voice Control (see the separate
Voice Control operating instructions)
Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and
illustrations in this section refer to COMAND.
Function restrictions
The telephone is not ready for use in the
following situations:
Rthe telephone automatically tries to log on
to a network. If no network is available, you
may not be able to make a "911"
emergency call. If you attempt to make an
outgoing call, the No Servicemessagewill
appear for a short while.
911 emergency call
G WARNING
The 911 emergency call system is a public
service. Using it without due cause is a
criminal offense.
The following requirements must be fulfilled
for a 911 emergency call:
Rthe mobile phone must be switched on.
Ra network must be available.
Ra valid and operational SIM card must be
inserted in the mobile phone.
Rthemobile phone is connected toCOMAND
via Bluetooth.
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
must arrange rescue measures yourself.
X Enter numbers on COMAND (Y page 121).
X Press the6 button.
The telephone makes the connection.
X Wait for the emergency call center to
respond and then describe the emergency.
Telephony via the Bluetooth
interface
Conditions
On the mobile phone
For telephony via COMAND's Bluetooth
interface, a Bluetooth-capable mobile
phone is required.
i Not all mobile phones available on the market are equally suitable. More detailed
information on suitable mobile phones and
on connecting Bluetooth-capable mobile
phones with COMAND can be found on the
Internet at
http://www.mbusa-mobile.com.
Alternatively, call the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(for USA) or Customer Relations at
1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
The battery of the mobile phone should
always be kept sufficiently charged in order
to prevent malfunctions.
In preparation for telephoning via the
Bluetooth interface, you should check the
following items on yourmobile phone (see the
mobile phone operating instructions):
RHands-Free Profile
The mobile phone must support Hands-
Free Profile 1.0 or above.
RBluetooth visibility
On certain mobile phones, the device itself
must be made "visible" to other devices, as
well as activating the Bluetooth function
(see the mobile phone operating
instructions).
RBluetooth device name
Every Bluetooth device has its own
Bluetooth device name. This device name
is freely definable, but can be identical for
all devices from the same manufacturer. It
is therefore recommended that you change
this name so that you can easily recognize
Telephony via the Bluetooth interface 115
T e le p h o n e
Z
your mobile phone (see the mobile phone
operating instructions).
i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength) depend on the supported version of the
Hands-Free Profile.
X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the
PIN when prompted to do so (see the
mobile phone operating instructions).
X Activate Bluetooth functions and, where
necessary, Bluetooth visibility on the
mobile phone (see the mobile phone
operating instructions).
On COMAND
X Activate the Bluetooth function in
COMAND (Y page 45).
Connecting a mobile phone
General information
Before using your mobile phone with
COMAND for the first time, you will need to
connect it.
When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is
connected automatically.
Connecting comprises:
Rsearching for a Bluetooth-capable mobile
phone
Rsubsequently authorizing it
You can connect up to 15 mobile phones.
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP
(Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP
(Message Access Profile) profiles, the
following contacts and messages are
downloaded into COMANDwhen connecting:
Rphone book
Rcall lists
Rtext messages
Information on both profiles can be found in
the "General notes" section (Y page 114).
Searching for a mobile phone
X Press the% function button on
COMAND.
X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu
by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.
X Select Update and pressW to confirm.
COMAND searches for Bluetooth
telephones within range and adds them to
the Bluetooth telephone list.
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth telephones within
range and their characteristics.
Example: Bluetooth phone list
: Currently connected# and authorized mobile phoneY
; Mobile phone not within range but
previously authorized (L appears in gray)
= Mobile phone in range and authorized
(L appears in black)
? Newly detected mobile phone within
range but not yet authorized (noY icon
yet)
The Bluetooth telephone list shows all
mobile phones within range and all previously
authorized mobile phones, whether or not
they are in range.
i If the Bluetooth telephone list is already full, you will be requested to de-authorize a
116 Telephony via the Bluetooth interface T e le p h o n e
mobile phone (Y page 119). If COMAND
does not find your mobile phone, external
authorization (Y page 118) may be
necessary.
i If you call up the telephone list again, the unauthorized devices are removed from the
list. In this case, start a new search to
update the Bluetooth telephone list.
Authorizing (registering) a mobile
phone
Option 1: using the passkey (access code)
X In the Bluetooth telephones list, select the
not yet authorized mobile phone by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Authorize and pressW to confirm. The input menu for the passkey appears.
The passkey is any one to sixteen-digit
number combination which you can choose
yourself. You must enter the same number
combination in COMAND and in the
Bluetooth-capable mobile phone (see the
operating instructions of the mobile phone).
i Some mobile phones require a passkey with four or more digits.
If you want to reauthorize a mobile phone
following de-authorization, you can select a
different passkey.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends de- authorization in COMAND and on the
mobile phone. Subsequent authorization
may otherwise fail.
X To enter a passkey in COMAND: press
the number keys in turn.
is highlighted after the first number
has been entered.
or
X Select the digits in the digit bar one by one
by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Then, select .
X To confirm an entry in COMAND: press
W the COMAND controller.
X Now enter the same passkey in the mobile
phone.
To make entries on the mobile phone: if
the Bluetooth connection is successful, you
will be requested to enter the passkey
(access code, code) (see the mobile phone
operating instructions).
X Enter the same passkey in the mobile
phone as already entered in COMAND.
i After entering the passkey, you may also need to enter a confirmation in your mobile
phone to connect calls. Please check your
mobile phone display.
If the COMAND display shows the
Authorization failed message, you
may have exceeded the prescribed time
period. Repeat the procedure.
The mobile phone is connected to COMAND
(authorized). You can now make calls using
the COMAND hands-free system.
Option 2: use Secure Simple Pairing
The mobile phone (or the Bluetooth audio
device) must support the Bluetooth version
2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing.
COMAND creates a six-digit code, which is
displayed on the two devices that are to be
connected.
Telephony via the Bluetooth interface 117
T e le p h o n e
Z
X If the numeric code on both devices
matches, confirm Yes by pressingW.
If you select Yes, the authorization process
is completed and the mobile phone is
connected.
If you select No, the process will be
canceled.
X Confirm the message on the mobile phone.
External authorization
If COMAND does not detect your mobile
phone, this may be due to particular security
settings on your mobile phone. In this case,
you can test if your mobile phone can find
COMAND. The Bluetooth device name of
COMAND is MB Bluetooth.
Please note the following: some mobile
phones require that you establish the
connection to COMAND again once you have
entered the passkey (see the mobile phone
operating instructions). The mobile phone
cannot otherwise be authorized.
X Press the% function button on
COMAND.
X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu
by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.
X Select Update.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select External Authorization and
pressW to confirm.
X Start the Bluetooth search on the mobile
phone (see the mobile phone operating
instructions).
X Select COMAND (MB Bluetooth) on the
mobile phone.
X Option 1: when requested to do so, enter
the passkey first on the mobile phone and
then in COMAND.
X Option 2: confirm the displayed codes on
the mobile phone and in COMAND (Secure
Simple Pairing).
Connecting another mobile phone
If you have authorized more than one mobile
phone, you can switch between the individual
phones.
i You can only switch to another authorized phone if you are not currentlymaking a call.
X Select the mobile phone in the Bluetooth
telephones list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The selected mobile phone is searched for
and connected if it is within Bluetooth
range and if Bluetooth is activated.
Only one mobile phone can be connected
at any one time. The currently connected
mobile phone is indicated by the# dot in
the Bluetooth telephones list
(Y page 116).
118 Telephony via the Bluetooth interface T e le p h o n e
Displaying details
X Press the% function button on
COMAND.
X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu
by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
Bluetooth telephones list.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
RBluetooth name
RBluetooth address
Ravailability status (shown after a new
search)
Rauthorization status
X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller.
De-registering (de-authorizing) a
mobile phone
i Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de-authorization on both COMAND and on
the mobile phone. Subsequent
authorization may otherwise fail.
X Press the% function button on
COMAND.
X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu
by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
Bluetooth telephones list.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to de-authorize this device.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth telephones list.
If you select No, the process will be
canceled.
i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone, you should also delete the device name MB
Bluetooth from your mobile phone's
Bluetooth list.
Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth
interface)
X Press the% function button.
If the mobile phone is ready for use, the
following display appears:
Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth interface)
: Telephone status
; Signal strength of mobile phone network
= Receiver icon or
? To display call lists
A Character bar
B Bluetooth name of the currently
connected mobile phone
C To display the COMAND phone book
Telephony via the Bluetooth interface 119
T e le p h o n e
Z
i Display; may vary, depending on the
mobile phone connected.
Bars: display the current signal strength
of the mobile phone network. If all bars are
filled, you have optimum reception.
If no bars are shown, reception is either
very poor or there is none at all.
Receiver icon= shows whether a call is
active/being connected or not.
Text message (SMS) display in
telephone basic menu
The Text Message menu item is available if
the Bluetooth telephone supports the MAP
Bluetooth profile (Message Access Profile)
and the text message has been downloaded
from the Bluetooth telephone. The menu
item is otherwise grayed out and is not
available.
The1mail icon is displayed when you have
an unread text message. The symbol
disappears once you have read the text
message. The mail symbol is displayed
when the text message memory is full. The
symbol disappears once you delete at least
one text message.
Further information can be found in the "Text
messages (SMS)" section (Y page 133).
Reception and transmission volume
Once the mobile phone has been authorized,
you can optimize the transmission and
reception volume settings. Find information
on the optimal setting for your mobile phone
on the Internet at
http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer
Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
i Incorrect settings may have a significant impact on the quality of calls.
X Press the% function button.
X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.
X Select an authorized mobile phone from
the list by turning cVd.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Reception Volume or
Transmission Volume and pressW to confirm.
: Scale with indicator showing current
volume
X Select a volume setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X To close the setting scale: pressW or slide XVY.
Telephone operation
Incoming call
Rejecting or accepting a call
When there is an incoming call, you see a
corresponding window in the display.
120 Telephone operation T e le p h o n e
X To reject: select Reject by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the~ button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
X To accept: confirm Accept by pressing
W.
or
X Press the6 button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Multifunction display (example)
i You can also accept the call by voice command using the Voice Control System
(see the separate operating instructions).
Once you have accepted the call, you can use
hands-free mode. The call volume can be
adjusted (Y page 34). For more information,
see the "Functions during a single call
connection" section (Y page 122).
The display shows the phone number or the
nameandphone number (if the entry is stored
in the address book) or shows the Unknown
(phone number withheld) message.
i You can also accept a call as described above when another main function is
switched on in COMAND. Once you have
accepted the call, the display switches to
telephone mode. After the call is finished,
you see the display of the previous main
application again.
The display does not switch to telephone
mode if you:
Rhide the window with the% button
next to the COMAND controller and then
Raccept the call with the; button on
the multifunction steering wheel
Making a call
Entering a telephone number using the
number keypad
X Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 119).
X Enter the digits using the number keypad.
X To connect a call: press the6 button
on COMAND or on the multifunction
steering wheel.
Entering a telephone number using the
telephone basic menu
X Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 119).
X Select the digits one by one by turning
cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X To connect a call: select in the
character bar and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the6 button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Telephone operation 121
T e le p h o n e
Z
Redialing
On COMAND
X Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 119).
X Select in the character bar and press
W to confirm.
or
X If the telephone basic menu is displayed,
press the6 button in COMAND.
In both cases, the calls dialed list appears.
The most recently dialed number is at the
top.
X To select a call: turn cVd the COMAND controller.
X To connect the call: pressW the COMAND controller.
Connecting a call to an entry in a call list
or in the COMAND phone book
X Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 129).
or
X Call up the COMAND phone book and
select an entry (Y page 126).
X To connect a call: pressW the COMAND controller or the6 button.
Making a call via speed dial
The speed dial list contains stored phone
book entries (Y page 131).
Option 1:
X Hold down one of the number keys for
longer than two seconds.
Option 2:
X Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 119).
X Select Call Lists by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The speed dial list appears.
X Select Speed Dial Preset List by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The speed dial list appears.
X Select the storage location and pressW to confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, the
telephone basic menu appears and
displays the selected entry. This initiates
dialing.
Functions available during a call
Overview
Telephone operation with a single call
: Person you are calling
; Icon for active telephone connection
= To switch hands-free microphone on/off
? To send DTMF tones (not possible with all
mobile phones)
A To end a call
The following functions:
Raccepting a waiting call
Rmaking a further call
Rcall waiting
are available if they are supported by the
network (only possible with a GSM network)
and your Bluetooth mobile phone.
122 Telephone operation T e le p h o n e
Switching the hands-free microphone
on/off
This function is also available during an active
phone call.
X Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 119).
X To switch off: select Mike Off and press
W to confirm. If the microphone is switched off, the
display shows theQ icon and the The
microphone is offmessage appears for
a short period.
X To switch on: select Mike On and press
W to confirm. TheQ symbol disappears. You will briefly
see the The microphone is onmessage.
Ending an active call
X Select in the telephone basicmenu and
pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the~ button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The call on hold is activated.
Rejecting or accepting a waiting call
The call waiting function must be supported
by the mobile phone network provider and be
enabled. Depending on the mobile phone
used, the system behavior differs when
accepting a call (option 1 and 2).
If you have a call in progress and receive
another call, a new window appears in the
display. You also hear a tone. You can accept
or reject the call.
X To reject: select Reject and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the~ button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
X To accept: select Accept and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the6 button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Option 1: if you accept the waiting call, the
active call is ended.
The active call will also be ended if you
accept the waiting call using the Voice
Control System (see the separate
operating instructions).
Option 2: if you accept the waiting call, the
active call is put on hold. You can then
switch back and forth between both calls
(toggling) (Y page 124).
i The second option is available if your mobile phone supports the toggling
function (via Bluetooth).
Valid for both options: if you accept the
waiting call using themobile phone, the active
call is put on hold. You then have two calls.
The call you have just accepted is active.
The COMAND display changes. If you
continue to operate functions on the mobile
phone, the COMAND display may differ from
that of the mobile phone.
Making a further call
You can make a second call while on the
phone with someone else. This action puts
the previous call on hold. The function is
available if your mobile phone supports this
function via Bluetooth.
: Symbol for making a second call
Telephone operation 123
T e le p h o n e
Z
X Select symbol: by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the; button on COMAND.
X Enter the phone number:
Rmanually (Y page 121)
Rusing the phone book (Y page 125)
Rfrom the call lists (Y page 129)
Rusing speed dial (Y page 122)
Call waiting
You can switch back and forth between calls
with this function. The function is available if
your mobile phone supports the toggling
function (via Bluetooth).
You can use the function if you are answering
a second call or making a second call.
Switching between the active call and the
call on hold
: Active call
; Call on hold
X Confirm symbol; by pressingW.
or
X Press the; button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The previous call on hold is activated.
Ends an active call
X Select in the telephone basicmenu and
pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the~ button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The call on hold is activated.
Conference call
You can interconnect calls (active and on
hold) on the mobile phone. This permits
several parties to hear one another and speak
with one another.
You can also make a further call in COMAND
(Y page 123).
Sending DTMF tones
This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Answering machines or other devices can be
controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote
query functions.
X If you would like to listen to the messages
on your answering machine, for example,
select the corresponding number.
X To transmit individual characters: once
a connection has been established to the
answering machine, select the desired
characters in the character bar and press
W to confirm.
or
X Press the corresponding key on the
COMAND number keypad.
Every character selected will be
transmitted immediately.
X To send a phone book entry as a DTMF
sequence: select Name by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select the desired phone book entry and
pressW to confirm. The entry is sent as a DTMF character
string.
124 Telephone operation T e le p h o n e
X To return to the call display: select
Back and pressW to confirm.
i You can also send DTMF tones using the Voice Control System (see the separate
operating instructions).
Using the phone book
Introduction
The phone book displays the names and
phone numbers of all of the address book
entries saved in the COMAND address book.
If an address book entry does not have a
telephone number, it does not appear in the
phone book.
You can store telephone numbers in the
phone book or import contacts. The phone
book of the mobile phone is automatically
downloaded to COMAND after connection.
You can import contacts from the memory
card and the USB device into the phone book,
or receive vCards via Bluetooth.
The functions:
Rimporting contacts
Rreceiving vCards
Rdeleting contacts
are described in detail in the "Address
book" section (Y page 141).
i The stored phone book and the vCards remain in COMAND, even if you use
COMAND with another mobile phone. The
entries can be viewed without a mobile
phone. For this reason, delete the phone
book before selling or transferring
ownership of your vehicle.
Calling up the phone book
Overview
X Select Name in the telephone basic menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If the phone book contains entries, they will
be displayed in alphabetical order.
Character bar= is active.
The character bar is used for fast selection
of an entry.
X To close the phone book: select& in
the character bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
or
X Press the% button.
Using the phone book 125
T e le p h o n e
Z
Symbol overview
Icon Explanation
Address book entry that has been entered or changed via COMAND
Imported contact that has been saved in the phone or address book
\ Address book entry with voice tag
i These entries have also been assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are available in vehicles with the Voice Control System (see the separate operating
instructions).
Contact that has been imported from a mobile phone that supports PBAP
Entry that has been imported from the memory card or USB device
Entry imported via the Bluetooth interface
Searching for a phone book entry
Using the character bar
You determine the first letter of the entry you
are looking for with the first character you
enter.
X Select a character by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The first entry in the list that starts with the
letter selected is highlighted. If there are
similar entries, the next different character
is shown. For example, with entries such as
Christel and Christine, the beginnings
of the names are similar. In this case, you
will be offered a choice between E and I.
X Select the characters of the entry you are
searching for one by one and pressW to confirm.
When the selection is clear, COMAND
switches automatically to the selection list.
X To complete the search: switch from the
phone book with the character bar to the
selection list (Y page 127).
The last list entry is automatically
highlighted.
Using the number keypad
Alternatively, you can also enter digits using
the number keypad (direct entry)
(Y page 29).
Deleting characters
X To delete an individual character: select
the2 symbol by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW briefly.
or
X Briefly press the2 button
Each time a character is deleted, the entry
most closely resembling the remaining
characters is shown at the top of the list.
X To delete an entry: select the2 symbol by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW until the entry is deleted.
or
X Press and hold the2 button until the
entire entry is deleted.
Changing the language of the character
bar
X SelectB and pressW.
X Select the desired language.
126 Using the phone book T e le p h o n e
Changing the character set of the
character bar
X Selectp and pressW to confirm. The character set changes each time you
make this selection.
Selecting an entry directly from the list
You can switch to the list at any time during
character entry.
X SlideVZ the COMAND controller repeatedly or press and holdW until the character bar disappears.
or
X Select and pressW to confirm.
X To select an entry: turn cVd the COMAND controller until the desired entry
is highlighted and pressW to confirm.
To select a phone number: theG icon indicates that an entry contains more than
one phone number.
X Select a phone book entry with theG icon and pressW to confirm. The sub-entries appear. TheG icon changes toI.
Phone book entry with several entries
X Select a sub-entry by turning cVd and pressW to confirm.
X To return to the phone book using the
character bar: select& in the list and
pressW to confirm.
or
X Press the% back button.
Displaying details for an entry
X Select an entry in the selection list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The detailed view appears.
X To close the detailed view: slide XVY repeatedly until the entry is highlighted
again or press the% back button.
Deleting an entry from the phone
book
If the entry contains only phone numbers, it
is deleted from the phone book and address
book.
If there is additional data included along with
the phone number, e.g. a navigable
destination, the entry is deleted from the
phone book but retained in the address book.
X Select an entry in the selection list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry is deleted in
accordancewith the rules described above.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
Using the phone book 127
T e le p h o n e
Z
Creating a new entry in the phone
book
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly in the phone book until the
selection list appears.
X Select the list symbol on the right in the
selection list by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select New entry and pressW to confirm.
X Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and pressW to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and pressW to confirm.
X Select Cont. and pressW to confirm. The input menu with data fields appears.
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
X Enter characters and save the entry.
Proceed as described under character
entry in the "At a glance" section
(Y page 28).
i The entry is created in the phone book and in the address book.
Adding telephone numbers to an
existing phone book entry
X Select an entry in the selection list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Add Phone No. and pressW to confirm.
X Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and pressW to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and pressW to confirm.
X Select Continue and pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the data if there are fewer
than five numbers assigned to the entry you
are searching for in the selected number
category.
If five numbers are stored for the entry in
the selected number category, a prompt
will appear asking whether you wish to
overwrite one of the existing numbers.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, a selection list will appear
containing the five existing numbers.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
X Select the number to be overwritten by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu appears. The data field for
entering the new phone number is
highlighted.
X Enter characters and save the entry.
Proceed as described under character
entry in the "At a glance" section
(Y page 28).
128 Using the phone book T e le p h o n e
Using call lists
Introduction
COMAND displays lists of calls received
(including missed calls) and made during
phone operation. Call lists are not available
unless a mobile phone is connected to
COMAND.
COMAND supports the PBAP Bluetooth
profile. How COMAND processes call lists
depends on the model of the mobile phone
connected:
RBluetooth telephone with PBAP
Bluetooth profile:
The call lists are downloaded automatically
from the mobile phone by COMAND as
soon as the mobile phone is connected to
COMAND.
RBluetooth telephone without PBAP
Bluetooth profile:
COMAND creates the call lists from calls
dialed and received (includingmissed calls)
as soon as the mobile phone is connected
with COMAND.
i For Bluetooth telephones without the
PBAP Bluetooth profile, the call lists in
COMAND are not synchronized with those
on your mobile phone. These calls may or
may not be listed on your mobile phone,
depending on the model.
i If no mobile phone is connected, then the Call Lists menu item is grayed out and
cannot be selected. If you connect amobile
phone other than the previous one to
COMAND, the previously available call lists
and their entries will be deleted
automatically. They are still available on the
mobile phone itself.
i The respective menu item can only be selected if calls have already been made or
received in COMAND.
Displaying missed calls in the COMAND
display is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Opening the call list and selecting an
entry
X Press the% function button.
X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic
menu by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Calls Received or Calls
Dialed using cVd and pressW to confirm.
The corresponding list appears.
List of selected phone numbers (example)
: To close the list
; Date/time (if available), symbols (if
assigned) and telephone number of the
entry highlighted
= To call up options
i You can also call up the list of dialed calls by pressing the6 button when the
telephone basic menu is shown. In this
case, the list will only show phone
numbers.
X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X To dial a phone number: pressW.
X To close the list: select Back and press
W to confirm or press the% button.
Using call lists 129
T e le p h o n e
Z
Displaying details about a list entry
COMANDcan also showa shortened list entry
in full.
X Select a list entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The detailed display appears.
X To go back to the list: slide XVY repeatedly until the list is highlighted.
Storing a phone number which has
not yet been stored
Introduction
For incoming calls from a person who is not
in the address book, COMAND displays the
phone number in the call list. You can save
this entry.
Storing as a new entry in the address
book
X Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 129).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Save and pressW to confirm.
i Save is shown in gray if the selected list entry has already been saved in the address
book.
X Select New Entry and pressW to confirm.
X Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and pressW to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile Phone, and pressW to confirm.
Number category Display (phone
book and address
book)
Not Classified No symbol
Home
Work
Phone category Display (phone
book and address
book)
Not classified ;
Mobile Phone
Car
Pager
X Select Save and pressW to confirm. An input menu with data fields is shown.
The data field for the telephone number is
filled in automatically.
: Data field with cursor
; Telephone number and symbol for the
phone category (automatically entered)
= Character bar
X Proceed as described under "Entering
characters" in the "Entering characters in
the address and phone books" section
(Y page 31).
130 Using call lists T e le p h o n e
Adding a phone number to an address
book entry
X Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 129).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Save and pressW to confirm.
i Save is shown in gray if the selected list entry has already been saved.
X Select Add Phone No. and pressW to confirm.
X Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and pressW to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile Phone, and pressW to confirm.
X Select Save.
The search menu for address book entries
appears.
X Search for the desired entry. Proceed as
described under "Searching for a phone
book entry" (Y page 126).
X PressWwhen you have finished searching. COMAND stores the data if there are fewer
than five numbers assigned to the entry you
are searching for in the selected number
category.
You will see a message to this effect.
If five numbers are stored for the entry you
are searching for, a prompt will appear
asking whether you wish to overwrite one
of the existing numbers.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, a selection list with the
five existing numbers is displayed.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
X Select the number to be overwritten in the
list by turningcVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm. COMAND overwrites the selected number
with the new data.
Deleting call lists
This function is available when COMAND
creates and manages the call lists.
This is the case if you use a Bluetooth
telephone without the support of the PBAP
Bluetooth profile.
i If you delete the call lists from the mobile phone (separate mobile phone operating
instructions), COMANDupdates the call list
display the next time it connects. The call
lists are empty in the case described.
X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete Call Lists and pressW to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete all call lists.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the call lists are deleted.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
Using the speed dial list
Storing a phone book entry in the
speed dial list
You can assign ten speed dial presets (0 9)
to the speed dial list. There are two options
available for this purpose.
Option 1:
X Search for a phone book entry in the phone
book (Y page 126).
X If an entry has several phone numbers,
select the desired number by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
Using the speed dial list 131
T e le p h o n e
Z
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.
X Select Speed dial by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
A menu appears.
Speed dial menu
X Confirm Assign Speed Dial Preset by
pressingW. The speed dial list appears. The selected
phone book entry is listed as the first entry.
The next available speed dial preset is
highlighted.
X Select the speed dial preset by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The phone book entry is saved in the speed
dial preset.
Option 2
X Call up the telephone basic menu; see
(Y page 119)
X Select Call Lists by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Speed Dial Preset List and
pressW to confirm. The speed dial list appears.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Confirm Assign Speed Dial Preset by
pressingW.
X Proceed as described under option 1.
Making a call via speed dial
A description can be found in the "Making a
call" section (Y page 122).
Deleting a speed dial number
X To delete a speed dial number: select
Delete Speed Dial Preset in the
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The speed dial number is deleted.
X To delete all speed dial numbers: select
Delete All Speed Dial Presets in the
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
You will be asked whether you want to
continue.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, all speed dial numberswill
be deleted from the speed dial list.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
132 Using the speed dial list T e le p h o n e
Text message (SMS)
Information and requirements
The functions can be used if the Bluetooth
mobile phone supports the MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth profile.
When the mobile phone is connected, the 30
most recent text messages which are
currently stored on the phone are loaded to
the COMAND's text message inbox and
displayed.
i COMAND may not load all the most recent text messages:
This is possible in exceptional cases, such
as with certain mobile phones, or when
there are a lot of text messages in the
phone's inbox.
If the above conditions are fulfilled, new
incoming text messages appear in the
COMAND text message inbox. In addition, a
tone sounds and the/ icon appears. The
symbol disappears once you have read the
text message. The mail symbol is
displayed when the text message memory is
full. The symbol disappears once you delete
at least one text message.
Displaying the text message (SMS)
inbox
Overview
X Press the% function button.
X Select Text Message in the telephone
basic menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The text message inbox appears.
Text message (SMS) inbox
The shortened text or sender of the selected
text message (depending on the settings) as
well as the date and time at which the
selected text message was received are
displayed at the top and in the middle. The
0 symbol appears if a text message has
not yet been read.
Reading a text message (SMS)
X Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The text message appears.
X To scroll through the display or select
phone numbers in a text message: turn
cVd the COMAND controller. The display scrolls up or down line by line,
or skips to the next or previous telephone
number and automatically highlights it.
X To return to the list: pressW and select
Back.
Listening to a text message
You can set the language (Y page 45) and the
speed of the read-aloud function
(Y page 42).
X PressW while a text message is being
displayed, select Read Aloud and press
W to confirm. COMAND reads out the text message.
Text message (SMS) 133
T e le p h o n e
Z
X To cancel the read-aloud function: press
the8 button.
or
X PressW, select Cancel Read-Aloud
Function and pressW to confirm.
Switching the display
You can switch between displaying the text
message sender or the textmessage content.
The sender display shows the sender of the
text message. If the sender is stored in the
COMAND phone book, the name is displayed.
The text display shows the first few words of
a text message.
X Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X To switch to the text display: select the
list symbol to the right of the text message
by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Display Text and pressW to confirm.
The view changes.
X To switch to the sender display: select
the list symbol to the right of the text
message by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Display Sender and pressW to confirm.
The view changes.
Displaying details and phone numbers
COMAND can also show a shortened sender
display in full.
X Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the text
message by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The detailed display appears.
X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Returning to the telephone basic menu
X Press the% back button.
Managing text messages
Calling a text message (SMS) sender
X PressW the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed.
X Select Call Sender and pressW to confirm.
The telephonemakes the call to the sender.
Using phone numbers in the text
You can use numbers that are red and
underlined in text messages (SMS).
i It is possible that a highlighted numerical sequence may not contain a telephone
number.
X Select a usable number when the text
message is displayed.
: Usable numerical sequence
X PressW the COMAND controller and
select Use.
X Select Call.
The telephone makes the call.
134 Text message (SMS) T e le p h o n e
i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no." functions to save this telephone number or
to add it to an existing entry.
Storing the sender as a new address
book entry
This function is not possible if the senders
telephone number is already stored in the
address book.
X PressW the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed.
X Select Save Number and pressW to confirm.
X Select New entry and pressW to confirm.
X Proceed as described in the "Storing as a
new entry in the address book" section
(Y page 130).
Storing a text message sender in an
existing address book entry
X PressW the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed.
X Select Save Number and pressW to confirm.
X Select Add Phone No. and pressW to confirm.
X Proceed from the step "Select a number
category" in the "Adding telephone
numbers to an existing phone book entry"
section (Y page 128).
Deleting a text message (SMS)
X Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the text
message by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A deletion prompt appears.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the text message is
deleted.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
i This delete function is not supported by all mobile phones. The Deletion
Procedure Failed message appears.
Using the address book
Introduction
G WARNING
Please devote your attention first and
foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
Before your journey, please familiarize
yourself with the address book functions.
Only use the COMAND when road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise you
could be involved in an accident in which you
or others could be injured.
The address book organizes and stores
entries which are entered from different
sources (mobile phone, memory card, USB
device, COMAND telephone book, navigation
system).
You can use these entries to make telephone
calls and for navigation.
i Number of contacts in the address book: the address book can store a total of
4000 contacts. 1500 entries are reserved
in the address book for mobile phone
contacts and 1500 for contacts you create
in COMAND or import from other sources.
The remaining 1000 entries are assigned
by COMAND as necessary.
i Display of mobile phone contacts: contacts downloaded from the mobile
phone remain in the address book even if
the mobile phone is disconnected from
COMAND. This means that contacts which
have previously been available can be
displayed as soon as the mobile phone is
reconnected. The contacts are downloaded
again so that any new contacts that have
been added to the mobile phone can be
displayed.
Using the address book 135
T e le p h o n e
Z
When a new mobile phone is connected to
COMAND, all the contacts from the
previousmobile phone are deleted from the
address book.
If a mobile phone is not (yet) connected to
COMAND, the contacts from that mobile
phonewill not (yet) be shown in the address
book.
Address book entries remain stored when
the mobile phone is disconnected.
Therefore, you should delete your personal
data using the reset function before selling
your vehicle, for example (Y page 47).
Calling up the address book
Option 1:
X Press the% function button.
You see the telephone basic menu or the
address book if it was open previously.
X When the telephone basic menu is
displayed, press the% function button
again.
Option 2:
X With the telephone basic menu shown,
select Phone by slidingVZ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Address Book from the menu and
pressW to confirm.
Address book with address book entry and
navigable data
i An address book entry can contain the following information: surname, first name,
company, two addresses, geo-coordinates
and up to five telephone numbers.
X To browse in the address book: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
X To close the address book: press the
% button.
Searching for an address book entry
X Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X Select Search in the address book by
slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If there are more than eight entries, the
searchmenu and the character bar appear.
Search menu with character bar
: Symbol for address book entry
; Symbol for complete address data
from the navigation system
= Character bar
? d Symbol for phone book entry from the mobile phone
A Entry with voice tag
Additional symbols are described in the
"Symbol overview" section (Y page 126).
X Proceed as described under "Searching for
a phone book entry" (Y page 126).
136 Using the address book T e le p h o n e
Creating a new entry in the address
book
You can enter address data directly into the
address book. If you store telephone
numbers in the COMAND phone book, these
are also saved in the address book. If you
store a navigation destination, COMAND
creates an address book entry which includes
the complete navigable address data.
X Call up the address book (Y page 136).
X Select New in the address book by sliding
V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu with data fields appears.
Input menu with data fields
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
X Enter characters and save the entry.
Proceed as described under "Entering
characters" in the "Entering characters in
the address and phone books" section
(Y page 31).
Deleting an address book entry
X Option 1: select Delete by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Option 2: search for an address book entry
(Y page 136).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, a prompt
will appear.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry will be deleted.
If you select No, the process will be
canceled.
Displaying the detailed view for an
address book entry
Selecting an entry
X Search for an address book entry and turn
cVd the COMAND controller to select it in the selection list (Y page 136).
or
X Select an address book entry by browsing
(Y page 136).
X In both cases, pressW. The detailed view appears.
Detailed display for business details
: Returns to the previous menu
; \ Symbol for business details
= Calls up options
Using the address book 137
T e le p h o n e
Z
Starting route guidance to an address
X Select the address data field by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The route to the destination address is
calculated and route guidance starts
(Y page 57).
Calling a telephone number
X Select the phone number data field by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. This initiates dialing and you can thenmake
your call (Y page 122).
Showing the details of an address book
entry
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The display is shown in full.
X To close the detailed display: press the
% button.
Changing an address book entry
Changing an entry
X Option 1: search for an address book entry
and turn cVd the COMAND controller to select it in the selection list (Y page 136).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.
X Select Edit and pressW to confirm.
X Option 2: call up the detailed view for an
address book entry (Y page 137).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Edit and pressW to confirm. Irrespective of the option, the input menu
containing data fields appears.
X Proceed as described under "Entering
characters" in the "Entering characters in
the address and phone books" section
(Y page 31).
Changing the category of a telephone
number data field
X Display the detailed view for an address
book entry (Y page 137) and highlight the
telephone number data field.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Change Category and pressW to confirm.
X Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile.
X If desired, select Preferred and pressW to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, you
switch the option onO or off. The phone number is displayed as the first
138 Using the address book T e le p h o n e
number in the phone book and can be
dialed immediately.
X Select Save and pressW to confirm. The new category is stored.
Calling a number stored in an entry
Conditions
The mobile phone must be connected via the
Bluetooth interface.
Option 1
X Display details for an address book entry
(Y page 137).
X Select the phone number data field by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The telephone makes the call. The display
switches to telephone mode.
Option 2
X Display details for an address book entry.
X Select the phone number data field by
turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
data field by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Call and pressW to confirm. The telephone makes the call.
Storing the phone number as a speed
dial number
X Display details for an address book entry.
X Select the phone number data field by
turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
data field by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Speed Dial and pressW to confirm.
You can now store the number in one of the
ten speed dial presets.
Starting route guidance to an entry
Note
This function is available as soon as you have
stored a destination in the destination
memory (Y page 95). COMAND also saves
destinations in the address book together
with all the data required for route guidance.
Option 1
X Search for an address book entry
(Y page 136) with theL icon and select it from the list.
X Display details for an address book entry
(Y page 138).
X Select the address data field by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Option 2
X Search for an address book entry
(Y page 136) with theL icon and select it from the list.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Navigate and pressW to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, route
guidance starts.
Option 3
Route guidance can also be started for an
address book entry without the symbol. If
the address data or designations do not
Using the address book 139
T e le p h o n e
Z
match the digital map, COMANDprompts you
to re-enter the address.
i It is best then to store the new address under the address book entry. This will
provide youwith an address book entry that
is suitable for navigation.
X Enter the destination address (Y page 54).
X Select Save from the address entry menu
and pressW to confirm.
X Assigning a destination to an address book
entry (Y page 96).
Voice tags
Adding or changing a voice tag
You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control
System (see the separate operating
instructions). Once you have assigned a voice
tag to an address book entry, you can call up
this entry with a voice command and dial a
phone number, for example. You can add one
voice tag per address book entry.
X Search for an address book entry with or
without a voice tag ( symbol)
(Y page 136).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Voice Name and pressW to confirm.
X Select Add or Change and pressW to confirm.
Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.
The Voice Control System guides you
through the dialogs.
Deleting a voice tag
X Search for an address book entry with a
voice tag (Y page 136).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Voice Name and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A deletion prompt appears.
X Select Yes or No and press the9 button to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the
voice tag.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
Listening to a voice tag
X Search for an address book entry with a
voice tag (Y page 136).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Voice Name and pressW to confirm.
X Select Listen and pressW to confirm. You hear the voice tag.
Storing a phone book entry from the
mobile phone in the address book
Using this function you can save imported
phone book entries in the address book.
The following can be used as a source:
Rthe mobile phone
Rthe memory card
Rthe USB device
Rthe Bluetooth Interface
Imported phone book entries are indicated in
the phone book by different icons
(Y page 126).
140 Using the address book T e le p h o n e
X Search for an entry in the phone book on
the mobile phoned (Y page 126).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Save Entry and pressW to confirm.
The Saving Procedure Successful
message appears. The phone book entry is
now saved as an address book entry.
Thed icon is replaced by the icon.
Importing contacts
Information and requirements
You can import contacts (vCards) from the
memory card and a USB device into the
address book, or receive vCards via
Bluetooth.
i Up to 2500 entries can be imported into the address book. A message notifies you
when the maximum number is reached.
You now have to delete existing entries
(Y page 137) in order to import new entries.
Depending on the source of the contact data,
different requirements apply:
Source Conditions
Memory card The SD memory card must
be inserted (Y page 157)
and must contain
importable contact data.
USB device The USB device must be
inserted in the USB port
and must contain
importable contact data.
Requirements for receiving vCards via
Bluetooth
You can receive vCards from devices (e.g.
from a PC) which support the sending of
vCards via Bluetooth.
It is not necessary to authorize the device in
COMAND to do so.
Please bear the following in mind:
RBluetooth must be activated in COMAND
and on the Bluetooth device (see
operating instructions for the device).
Rthe Bluetooth devicemust be able to send
vCards via Bluetooth (see operating
instructions for the device).
Rthe Bluetooth device in the vehicle must
be switched on.
Importing from thememory card orUSB
device
Entries imported from the memory card or
from a USB device have the symbol.
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to import vCards:
RvCards (vcf files)may be located in themain
directory or in folders. COMAND allows for
a targeted selection of the corresponding
directories.
RvCards must have the file extension ".vcf".
i A vcf file can also contain several vCards.
COMAND supports vCards in versions 2.1
and 3.0.
X Select Address Book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
select Phone by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Download Contacts and pressW to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select From The Memory Card or From
USB Device in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Add or Overwrite and pressW to confirm.
Add imports the entries from the memory
card or USB device into the address book.
Using the address book 141
T e le p h o n e
Z
Overwrite imports the entries from the
memory card or USB device and overwrites
all entries in the address book with the
symbol. The previous entries are then
no longer available.
After the contact data has been imported
successfully, you will see a message to this
effect. The address book or the respective
telephone basic menu is displayed.
i You can select the Overwritemenu item if the address book already contains
corresponding entries. A message notifies
you when the address book is full.
Receiving vCards via Bluetooth
Received vCards are identified by the
symbol in the address book.
i If you switch to another main function, e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the
reception of vCards will be terminated.
X Select Address Book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
select Phone by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears.
X Select Download Contacts and pressW to confirm.
X Select Received Business Cards in the
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
This interrupts the Bluetooth connection
between COMAND and your active mobile
phone. COMAND is, however, ready to
receive vCards from another Bluetooth
device (PC, mobile phone).
X Start the data transfer on the external
Bluetooth device (see the operating
instructions for the device).
The number of vCards received is
displayed.
X To end reception: pressW or the% back button.
COMAND then reconnects with the mobile
phone.
Deleting contacts
X Select Address Book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
select Phone by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears.
X Select Delete Contacts and pressW to confirm.
X Select one of the following options:
RInternal Contacts
RContacts From Storage Device
RReceived Business Cards
RDelete All
A prompt corresponding to your selection
appears.
X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.
If you select Yes, the contacts are deleted
according to your selection.
If you select No, the process will be
canceled.
142 Using the address book T e le p h o n e
COMAND features ............................. 144
Radio mode ........................................ 144
Satellite radio .................................... 148
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........ 154
Music search ..................................... 165
MUSIC REGISTER .............................. 168
Bluetooth audio mode .................... 172
Media Interface mode ...................... 178
Audio AUX mode ............................... 182
143
A u d io
COMAND features
These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND system at the time of
purchase. Country-specific deviations are
possible. Please note that your COMAND
system may not be equipped with all the
features described.
Radio mode
General information
i Portable electronic devices in the vehicle may seriously impair radio reception.
Switching to radio mode
Option 1
X Press$ the function button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband.
i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches between the FM, AM and WB
wavebands in that order and then calls up
SatRadio mode. Pressing the button again
takes you back to FM radio mode.
Option 2
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If radio mode was the last mode selected,
it will now be active.
If another audio mode is switched on, you
can now switch to radio mode in the audio
menu.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The audio menu appears.
Example: audio menu
: Current audio operating mode
; Main function bar
= Audio menu
X Select FM/AM Radio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Example: HD Radio display
: Display window with station settings
; Preset position of the selected station
= Name of the selected station (icon for HD
Radio and number of subprogram)
? Frequency of the selected station
A Sound settings
B FM radio, AM radio or WB radio
C Program information
D Preset functions
E Radio functions
144 Radio mode A u d io
Notes on HD Radio
i The functions of HD Radio include:
Rdigital transmission in the same
wavebands as analog AM/FM. The
analog AM/FM stations remain in the
same position when selecting a station.
Rthe ability to broadcast several program
streams over a single FM frequency (e.g.
HD1, HD2 etc.).
Rinterference-free, clear reception.
RFM: sound in CD quality; AM: sound as
on analog FM stations.
Rtext-based information (e.g. artist, track
name) in the display.
For further information on HD Radio, visit
http://www.hdradio.com.
You can deactivate HD Radio for the
selected frequency in the radio submenu.
X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding
V the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select HD Radio and pressW to confirm. HD Radio is deactivated if the check box is empty.
You hear the analog program of this
frequency.
As soon as you change to another HDRadio
frequency, the HD Radio is reactivated.
Switching wavebands
Option 1
You can switch the radio between the FM, AM
and WB waveband.
X Press the$ function button repeatedly
until the desired waveband is selected.
i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches between the FM, AM and WB
wavebands in that order and then calls up
SatRadio mode. Pressing the button again
takes you back to FM radio mode.
Option 2
X Select FM, AM or WB in the radio display by
slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Waveband submenu is opened.
1 Waveband submenu
The# dot shows the currently selected waveband.
X Select awaveband and pressW to confirm. You will hear the last station played on the
selected waveband.
Radio mode 145
A u d io
Selecting a station
Selecting a station using the station
search function
X Press theE orF button.
or
X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/selection
window in the radio display is active.
Station search scans up or down and stops
at the next station found.
Selecting stations via the station
presets
X Quick setting: press a number key, e.g.
l.
X Directly in the station presets: select
Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
or
X PressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.
The station preset memory appears. The
# dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored.
X Select a station by turning cVd and pressingW to confirm or press a number key, e.g.l.
Selecting stations by entering the
frequency manually
X Option 1: press thel button.
X Option 2: select Radio in the radio display
by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Enter Frequency and pressW to confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, an input
menu will appear.
X Enter a frequency using the number keys.
COMAND tunes in to the frequency
entered.
Waveband Frequency
AM (MF) 530 1700 kHz
FM (VHF) 87.7 107.9 MHz
WB (Weather Band) Weather report
channels
i You can only enter currently permitted numbers.
i If you enter a frequency in the FM or AM wavebands which is outside the frequency
range, COMAND tunes in to the next lower
frequency.
Storing stations
Storing stations manually
There are ten presets available for the FM and
AM wavebands.
X Quick save: press and hold a number key,
e.g.l, until you hear a tone.
The station is stored.
X Directly in the station presets: pressW the COMAND controller when the display/
selection window is active.
or
X Select Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In both cases, the station presets appear.
The# dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored.
146 Radio mode A u d io
Station memory (example)
X Select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press and hold
W until you hear a tone. The station is stored under the preset.
Storing stations automatically
This function automatically stores stations
with adequate reception under the presets.
The search starts at the lowest frequency.
COMAND stores any stations found,
beginning with preset 1. The storing process
ends once the highest frequency has been
reached or once ten stations have been
found. Any stations stored manually under
the presets will be lost. COMAND may not
occupy all memory slots when storing.
X Option 1: pressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is
active.
The station preset memory appears.
X Option 2: select Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The station preset memory appears.
X Irrespective of the option, select
Autostore and pressW to confirm. In both cases, COMAND searches for
stations that can be received. You will see
a message to this effect. The available
stations are automatically stored in the
preset positions.
X To cancel storing: select Cancel and
pressW to confirm.
Weather Band
Switching on
X Press the$ function button repeatedly
until the Weather Band is switched on.
or
X Select the currently set waveband FM or
AM by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select WB from the menu and pressW to confirm.
Searching for a channel
X Quick select: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/
selection window is active.
or
X Press theE orF button.
Channel search scans up or down and
stops at the next channel found.
Selecting a channel from the channel
list
X Select Channel by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The channel list appears.
Radio mode 147
A u d io
X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press a number key on the control panel,
e.g. 4, at any time.
Displaying station information
This function is only available for analog FM
programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD
Radio).
Information relevant to the current station is
shown below the main function bar.
X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding
V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Show Station Information by
slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status, you
switch Show Station Information on
O or off.
Displaying program information
This function is only available for analog FM
programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD
Radio).
Information relevant to the current station is
shown in the display window.
X Select Info in the radio display by sliding
V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Information on the currently selected
station is displayed. Content is dependent
on the station.
X To return to the radio display: confirm
Info by pressingW.
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.
Satellite radio
Important notes
This section provides detailed information on
the following topics:
Rselecting a channel and program category
Rmemory functions
Rsound settings
i The satellite radio mode described below requires optionally available satellite radio
equipment and registration with a satellite
radio provider.
i Note that the categories and channels shown in the illustrations depend on the
program content offered by the provider.
The program contents may vary. The
illustrations and descriptions in these
operating instructions may therefore differ
from the channels and categories offered
by the provider.
Satellite radio mode may be temporarily
unavailable or interrupted for a variety of
reasons. These reasons include
148 Satellite radio A u d io
environmental or topographical conditions
as well as other issues beyond the control
of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Operation
may also be impaired in certain locations
(e.g. tunnels, multi-storey car parks or
within as well as close to buildings).
i SIRIUS XM Radio offers more than 130 digital-quality radio channels providing
100% commercial-free music, sports, news
and entertainment.
SIRIUS XM Radio employs a fleet of high-
performance satellites to broadcast around
the clock throughout the USA and Canada.
The satellite radio program is available for
a monthly fee. Details are available from
the SIRIUS XM Service Center and at
http://www.sirius.com (USA) or
http://www.siriuscanada.com
(Canada).
Registering satellite radio
X Switch on satellite radio mode
(Y page 149).
The satellite radio main menu appears
showing the weather channel. You cannot
select any other stations.
X Select Sat Radio in the lower menu bar
and pressW to confirm.
X Select Service and pressW to confirm. The service information screen appears.
Service information screen
1 Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM)
2 SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver
X Call the phone number of your satellite
radio provider shown on the screen.
i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS
XM Radio website at
http://www.sirius.com (USA) or
http://www.siriuscanada.com
(Canada).
Once the connection has been established:
X Follow the instructions of the service staff.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes. If the activation is completed
successfully, the No Service message
appears in the display, followed by the
satellite radio main menu.
i If registration is not included when purchasing the system, your credit card
details will be required to activate your
account.
If the satellite receiver is not installed or
installed incorrectly, the Device
unavailable message will appear.
Switching on satellite radio mode
Notes
You can also use the multifunction steering
wheel to tune in channels or scroll through
lists, e.g. by pressing the=; 9: buttons (Y page 23).
For important notes on registration, see
"Registering satellite radio" (Y page 149).
Option 1
X Press$ the function button.
The No Service message appears after
switching on or if no signal is being
received. Once COMAND receives the
signal, the satellite radio display appears.
The station last selected is played.
i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches through the wavebands in the
order FM, AM, WB and subsequently
Satellite radio 149
A u d io
switches on the satellite radio. Pressing the
button again takes you back to FM radio
mode.
Option 2
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If satellite radio mode was the last mode
selected, it will now be active.
If another audio mode is switched on, you
can now switch to satellite radio mode in
the audio menu.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The audio menu appears.
X Select Sat Radio and pressW to confirm.
The No Service message appears when
starting up or if no signal is being received.
If the satellite receiver is not installed or is
not installed correctly, the Device
Unavailable message will appear.
Once COMAND receives the signal, the
satellite radio display appears. The station
last selected is played.
Satellite radio main menu
1 Satellite radio main display
2 Channel name
3 Preset
4 Selected category/channel number
5 Channel information (in brief)
6 Sound settings
7 Category list
8 Channel information (in detail)
9 Channel preset list
a Satellite radio menu
Channel informationA can be viewed in
detail (Y page 153).
Changing the category
Satellite radio stations are sorted into various
categories. You can choose between the
different categories, such as news/talk
shows, sports or country, if they are available.
The category list is sorted alphabetically.
Selecting a category
X To call up the category list: select
Category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.
X To select a category: select a category by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm. The category selected is shown in the
display. You hear the station last selected
for this category.
The All Channels category is at the top
of the category list. This category is sorted
150 Satellite radio A u d io
by channel number and allows you to
browse all available channels.
Selecting a channel
Channel search
X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/selection
window in the SatRadio display is active.
or
X Press theE orF button.
COMAND searches in both directions
(ascending and descending) and stops at
the next channel found in the selected
category.
Satellite radio menu
X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The satellite radio menu appears.
Entering channel numbers directly
Option 1
X Press thel button.
An input menu appears.
Option 2
X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Channel Entry and pressW to confirm.
An input menu appears.
X To enter a channel: irrespective of the
option, press the corresponding number
keys on the control panel one after the
other.
COMAND sets the selected channel.
i You can only select currently permitted digits.
Selecting a channel from the SatRadio
channel list
You can select a channel using either the
channel list (option 1) or the channel list that
displays the artists or tracks currently being
played (option 2).
X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Option 1
X Select Channel List and pressW to confirm.
The channel list appears.
Satellite radio 151
A u d io
X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Option 2
X Select Channel List with Artist,
Title and pressW to confirm. The channel list appears and displays the
artists and tracks currently being played.
X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Memory functions
Storing channels
i There are ten presets available.
X PressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.
or
X Select Presets in the submenu bar by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. In both cases, the channel presets appear.
TheR dot in front of a preset entry
indicates that the currently selected
station is stored under this preset.
Station presets
X Select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press and hold
W until you hear a tone.
or
X Press and hold a number button, e.g.
n, until you hear a tone.
The channel is stored under the preset.
Storing channels automatically
This function automatically stores channels
with adequate reception in the preset
memory. Channels stored manually in the
preset memory will be overwritten.
X Option 1: pressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is
active.
X Select Autostore in the presets by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Option 2: select Presets in the submenu
bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Autostore and pressW to confirm. In both cases, COMAND searches for
channels that can be received. You will see
a message to this effect. The available
channels are automatically stored in the
preset positions.
X To cancel storing: select Cancel and
pressW to confirm.
152 Satellite radio A u d io
Selecting a channel from the preset list
X To call up the preset list: select
Presets in the submenu bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The channel preset list appears.
X To set a channel: select a preset by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press a number key, such asn.
Displaying information
X Select Info in the submenu bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Information on the currently received
program is displayed.
If available, you see:
Rthe complete channel name
Rthe artist of the currently played track
Rthe currently played track
X To return to the radio display: confirm
Info by pressingW.
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.
Displaying service information
The provider's customer service center is
available by phone at any time to answer any
general questions or questions on the
versions available.
X Select Sat radio in the submenu bar by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Service and pressW to confirm. The provider's details appear.
1 Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM) or
Call Service Provider
2 SIRIUS ID of your satellite receiver
X To return to the SatRadio main display:
slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Channel list updates
When receiving a new channel list, the display
shows the Updating Channels...
message.
The station last selected is switched to mute
until the update has been completed.
Satellite radio mode is not available during
this process.
Once the update has been completed, the
satellite radio main menu appears. The
station last selected is played.
Sound settings
You will find details on the sound settings in
the "At a glance" section (Y page 34).
Satellite radio 153
A u d io
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Important safety notes
G WARNING
COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser
product. You must not open the casing. If you
open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or
damaged, there is a risk of exposure to
invisible laser radiation. This may damage
your eyes, or those of others.
COMAND does not contain any parts that can
be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,
all maintenance work must be carried out by
qualified aftersales technicians.
G WARNING
Only when the vehicle is stationary should
you:
Rload a disc
Reject a disc
There is a risk of being distracted from the
road and traffic conditions if this is done while
the vehicle is in motion.
Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDs
Notes
If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must
face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted.
If neither side is printed, the side to be played
should face downwards. The system may not
be able to play CDs/DVDs with copy
protection.
i If a medium contains other files in addition to music files, the loading time
before the first track starts to play may be
longer.
Inserting discs into the DVD changer
The DVD changer has a fixed magazine with
six trays.
X To insert a CD/DVD into the magazine
tray: press theV load/eject button.
A menu shows the current load status of
the magazine trays. The last tray selected
is identified by a red digit.
Magazine menu
X Select a magazine tray to be filled by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press a number key, e.g.j.
The DVD changer switches to the selected
magazine tray. You see the Please
wait... message.
You then see the Please insert disc
i Never insert a data medium before COMAND prompts you to do so. Never
insert more than one disc into a magazine
tray at a time.
X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the
printed side facing upwards.
154 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io
The DVD changer loads the disc into the
selected magazine tray. The Loading
disc
i It may take some time for the disc to be loaded, depending on the type of disc. If no
disc is inserted for approximately 20
seconds, the display returns to the
magazine menu.
The DVD changer plays the disc if:
Rit has been inserted correctly.
Rit is a permissible type of disc.
: Full magazine tray (eject function is
available)
; Empty magazine tray (disc can be
inserted)
X To exit the menu: press theV eject/
load button again or press the% back
button.
or
X Select Back by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X To fill empty magazine trays: press the
V load/eject button.
The magazine menu appears.
X Select Fill Empty Slots.
You see the Please Wait... message.
COMAND switches to the next empty
magazine tray. You then see the Please
Insert Disc
i Never insert a data medium before COMAND prompts you to do so. Never
insert more than one disc into a magazine
tray at a time.
X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the
printed side facing upwards.
You see the Please Wait... message.
Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer
switches to the next empty tray. You see
the Please Insert Disc
X Repeat this step until all trays are loaded.
The DVD changer will play the last disc
loaded if it has been inserted correctly and
is of a permissible type. This applies even
if not all trays have been loaded with a disc.
X To cancel loading: press theV eject/
load button again or press the% back
button.
i If you cancel loading with the% back
button, the system loads and plays the last
CD you inserted.
Ejecting discs from the DVD changer
If you remove one disc while playing another
disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback.
Playback continues once the disc has been
ejected.
X To eject a CD/DVD: press theV load/
eject button.
Themagazinemenu appears. Themagazine
tray with the current disc is highlighted.
: Eject possible
; Disc type
= Disc name (only if stored on the disc)
? Current disc
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 155
A u d io
Z
X Select a magazine tray containing a disc by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
or
X Press a number key, e.g.j.
You see the message: Ejecting Disc
message:
X Take the disc out of the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot,
COMANDwill draw it in again automatically
after a short while and load it again.
X To eject all CDs/DVDs: press theV load/eject button.
The magazine menu appears.
X Select Eject All by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The DVD changer ejects the last disc
selected. You see themessage: Ejecting
Disc
X Take the disc out of the disc slot when you
see the Please Remove Disc
message.
The DVD changer switches to the next
loaded magazine tray and ejects the disc.
X Repeat the last step until the magazine is
empty.
X To exit the menu: press theV eject/
load button again or press the% back
button.
or
X Select Back by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Inserting and ejecting an SD memory
card
General information
COMAND supports SD memory cards
(Secure Digital) and SDHC memory cards
(Secure Digital High Capacity).
i Not all memory cards available on the market are designed for the temperatures
which may be reached in the vehicle.
If you are no longer using the SD memory
card, remove it from COMAND, as high
temperatures could damage the card.
Due to the wide range of SD memory cards
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all brands of SD memory
card.
The readable storage capacity depends on
the memory card used. You can obtain
further information at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
156 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io
Inserting an SD memory card
X Insert the memory card into the slot until it
engages in place. The side with the
contacts must face downwards and point
towards the slot.
COMAND loads the memory card and
shows a message to this effect. If no MP3
tracks can be found, youwill see amessage
to this effect.
Ejecting an SD memory card
X Press the memory card.
The memory card is ejected.
X Take the memory card out of the slot
(Y page 17), positionH.
Connecting a USB device
The USB port is located in the stowage
compartment in the center console.
Electrical consumption at this connection
must not exceed a continuous current of
500 mA. If the electrical consumption is
higher, use a separate source to provide
power for the USB device (e.g.
12 V power supply).
X Connect the USB device (e.g. USB stick) to
the USB port.
Activating audio CD/DVD or MP3
mode
Option 1
X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 154), SDmemory
card (Y page 157) or connect a USB device
(Y page 157).
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
starts to play it.
Option 2
X Press theh function button one ormore
times.
i By pressing the function button
repeatedly, you can change the operating
mode in the following order:
Raudio CD/DVD / video DVD/MP3 CD/
MP3 DVD in the DVD changer (disc
mode)
Rmemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth audio mode
X Select an audiomedium from themedia list
(Y page 159).
Option 3
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The last active audio source is now
activated.
You can activate a different audio source
using the audio menu.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears.
X Select Disc, Memory Card, Music
Register, USB Storage or Media
Interface and pressW to confirm. This switches to the desired audio source.
X Select an audiomedium from themedia list
(Y page 159).
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 157
A u d io
Z
Example display: audio CD mode
: CD cover (if available)
; Track time
= Track number and track name (only if
stored on the disc as CD text or if
Gracenote data is available)
? Graphic time and track display
A Disc type, disc position in the media list
and disc name (only if stored on the disc
as CD text or if Gracenote data is
available)
B Artist (only if stored on the disc as CD text
or if Gracenote data is available)
C CD mode menu
Example display: audio DVD mode
: Cover (if available)
; Track time
= Track number
? Graphic time and track display
A Disc type, disc position in the media list,
disc name (only if stored on the disc)
B Audio DVD mode menu
Example display: MP3 mode
: Cover (if available)
; Track time
= Track number and name
? Graphic time and track display
A Medium type, position of medium in the
media list, current folder
B Artist (if available)
C MP3 mode menu
Pause function
In audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
X To pause playback: briefly press the
8 button.
The, symbol appears at the top left in
the status bar.
X To continue playback: briefly press the
8 button again.
The, symbol disappears.
158 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io
In audio DVD mode only
X To pause playback: switch on audio DVD
mode (Y page 157).
X Select by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The display changes to.
X To continue playback: select and
pressW to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted. The display changes
to.
Stop function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 157).
X To interrupt playback: select by
slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The display changes to. remains highlighted.
X To continue playback: select and
pressW to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
X To stop playback: while playback is
interrupted, select again and press
W to confirm.
or
X Select and confirm by pressingW twice in rapid succession.
is highlighted.
X To restart playback: select and
pressW to confirm. Playback starts at the beginning of the
DVD.
Selecting audio CD/DVD/MP3 discs
Selecting via the media list
X In audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode: select
Media by slidingV or turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The media list appears. The# dot indicates the currentmediumbeing played.
Media list when equipped with a DVD changer
: To display all magazine trays
The media list shows the discs currently
available.
Media list
Magazine trays, positions 1 to 6: readable
datamedia are audio CDs,MP3CDs orMP3
DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDs.
Memory card, position 7
MUSIC REGISTER, position 8
USB storage device, position 9
Media Interface, position 0
Bluetooth audio
i If a disc cannot be read, an entry appears next to the corresponding magazine tray.
X To show all magazine trays: pressW the COMAND controller when: is
highlighted.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 159
A u d io
Z
Media list showing all magazine trays
X Select the data medium by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
i If you select a video DVD, the system switches to video DVD mode
(Y page 186).
Selecting a track using the number
keypad
X Press a number key, e.g.n, when the
display/selection window is active.
The medium at the corresponding position
in the media list is loaded and then played.
Selecting a track
Selecting by skipping to a track
X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.
or
X Press theE orF button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
The skip back function skips to the
beginning of the current track if the track
has been playing for more than
eight seconds. If the track has been playing
for less than eight seconds, it skips to the
start of the previous track.
If you have selected the playback options
Random Tracks or Random Folder, the
track order is random.
Selecting a track using the number
keypad
X Press the button on the number
keypad.
A numerical entry field appears. The
number of positions offered corresponds to
the number of tracks on the CD/DVD. Only
numbers that correspond to a track
number on the CD/DVD can be entered.
X Enter the desired track number using the
number keys.
The track plays after the last possible
number is entered.
i Pressing and holding a number key for more than two seconds completes the
entry, and the corresponding track is
played.
Selecting a track using music search
Select music via categories (e.g. album,
artist) with the music search function.
If you select a category, COMAND starts a
search for track information if the following
conditions are fulfilled:
Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected
Rthe track information from these data
carriers is not yet contained in the
COMAND music database
COMAND imports track information from the
following data carriers:
Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3)
Rmemory card
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
The Track information is complete
message appears once the search is
completed. COMAND stores the music data
in its own database. You can now select the
available music data within the desired
category.
160 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io
You will find further information on searching
for music in the "Music search" section
(Y page 165).
X In audio CD/audio DVD mode/MP3 mode,
select Search by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears.
X Select Current Tracklist, Folder or a
category and pressW to confirm.
Current track list (example)
X Select the track by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The basic display appears and the track is
played.
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X While the display/selection window is
active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND
controller until the desired position has
been reached.
or
X Press and hold theE orF button
until the desired position is reached.
Gracenote Media Database
Introduction
This function is only available in audio CD
mode.
There is a version of Gracenote music
recognition technology (Emeryville,
California, USA) on the COMAND hard disk.
You will recognize this by the logo which can
be seen in the bottom right-hand corner of
certain audio displays.
Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMAND
uses the information contained therein to
display the artist, album and track name.
If the audio CD does not contain any CD text
information, COMAND can use the Gracenote
Media Database to identify unknown audio
tracks when running in audio CD mode. This
is only possible if the relevant information is
saved in the Gracenote Media Database and
if the "Gracenote Media Database" function
is activated.
If this is the case, COMAND will display the
corresponding data such as artist, album and
track name in the relevant displays and lists.
If COMAND accesses the Gracenote Media
Database when reading an audio CD, you will
see the following message:
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 161
A u d io
Z
Selecting Gracenote data to be
displayed
If several entries exist for the CD of a
particular artist, you can select which of the
entries should be shown.
If the inserted CD does not contain any
Gracenote data, the Gracenote Media
Database menu item is shown in gray and
cannot be selected.
X Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 157).
X Select CD by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Gracenote Media Database by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.
The# dot indicates the current selection for the display.
X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Switching the Gracenote data display
on/off
X Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 157).
X Select CD by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Gracenote Media Database by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X To switch off the display: select None and
pressW to confirm.
In the basic display (Y page 158), Track
1, Track 2 etc. are shown instead of the
Gracenote data, for example.
X To switch on the display: select an entry
in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Updating Gracenotemusic
recognition technology and the
Gracenote Media Database
The digital data on the Gracenote Media
Database needs to be updated due to the
release of new CDs. Optimum functionality
can only be attained with up-to-date
Gracenote music recognition technology.
Information about new versions can be
obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
You can have your music recognition
software updated there with a DVD, or you
can update it yourself.
i The Gracenote Media Database is updated in conjunction with the navigation
system's digital map (Y page 109).
Displaying the track and album
X Press thez button.
The current track and album are displayed
in a window.
162 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io
Displaying metadata (MP3 mode)
COMAND can also display the album name
and artist (metadata) during playback, if this
information has been entered into the
system.
For all media that containMP3 data (e.g. MP3
CD, SD memory card, MUSIC REGISTER), you
can determine whether:
Rthe metadata contained in the tags of the
encoded music data should be displayed
Rthe file and directory names should be
displayed during playback
X To display the album and artist name:
select MP3 or USB in the basic display by
slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Display Track Information and
pressW to confirm.
Selecting a group
The content of an audio DVD can be divided
into up to 9 groups. The availability and type
of group depends on the respective DVD.
A group can contain music in different sound
qualities (stereo and multichannel formats,
for example), or bonus tracks.
Each group can contain up to 99 tracks.
If an audio DVD only contains one audio
format, the Group menu item(s) cannot be
selected.
X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 157).
X Select DVD-A by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Group by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The# dot indicates the group currently selected.
X Select the desired group by turning cVd and pressW to confirm.
X To exit themenu: slide XVY the COMAND controller or press the% back button.
Selecting an active partition (USB
mass storage devices only)
You can select this function for USB mass
storage devices when the storage device is
partitioned. Up to 9 partitions (primary or
logical; FAT and FAT32) are supported.
X Select MP3 in the basic display by sliding
V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Select Active Partition and
pressW to confirm.
Playback options
The following options are available to you:
RNormal Track Sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
InMP3mode, the track order is determined
by the order in which the tracks are written
to the MP3 data carrier when it is created.
Alphabetical order is the most common.
Once all the tracks in a folder have been
played, the tracks in the next folder are
played.
RRandom Media
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only)
You hear the tracks of the current track list
or the currently active folder (including all
sub-folders) in random order.
X To select options: switch on audio CD/
DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 157).
X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The options list appears. The# dot indicates the option selected.
X Select an option by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options
except "Normal track sequence", you will
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 163
A u d io
Z
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window. See the example of the
display in audio CD mode (Y page 158).
i The "Normal track sequence" option is automatically selected when you change
the medium you are currently listening to
or when you select a different medium. If
an option is selected, it remains selected
after COMAND is switched on or off.
Notes on MP3 mode
General information
Depending on the volume and format of the
MP3 data, the length of time required for
reading the data may increase.
Permissible data carriers
RCD-R and CD-RW
RDVD-R and DVD-RW
RDVD+R and DVD+RW
RSD memory card
RUSB storage device
Permissible file systems
RISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs
RUDF for audio and video DVDs
RFAT16 or FAT32 for SD memory cards and
USB storage media
Multisession CDs
For multisession CDs, the content of the first
session determines how COMAND will
process the CD. COMAND plays only one
session and gives priority to the audio CD
session.
If possible, use COMAND to play only CDs
which have been written in one session.
File structure of a data carrier
When you create a disc with compressed
music files, the tracks can be organized in
folders. A folder may also contain subfolders.
A disc can contain a maximum of 255 folders.
Each folder can contain a maximum of
255 tracks and 255 subfolders.
The disc may contain no more than eight
directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level
will not be recognized by the system.
Track and file names
When you create a disc with compressed
music files, you can assign names to the
tracks and folders.
COMAND uses these names accordingly for
the display. Folders which contain data other
thanMP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by
COMAND.
If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root
directory itself, the root directory will also be
treated as a folder. COMAND will then show
the name of the root directory as the folder
name.
You must observe the following when
assigning track names:
Rtrack names must have at least one
character.
Rtrack names must have the extension
"mp3" or "wma".
Rthere must be a full stop between the track
name and the extension.
Example of a correct track name:
"Track1.mp3".
Permissible formats
COMAND supports the following formats:
RMPEG1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)
RMicrosoft WindowsMedia Audio V2, V7, V8
and V9 (WMA)
Radditional music files in AAC format with
the file extensions .aac, .mp4, .m4a
and .m4b, but not copy-protected iTunes
music files with the extension .m4p.
i If, in addition to MP3 files, there are other music files in these audio formats stored on
164 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io
the disc, the loading process may require a
longer time before the first track is played.
i The MP3 audio encoding method is under license from Fraunhofer IIS (Institut
Integrierte Schaltungen Institute for
Integrated Circuits) and Thomson.
Permissible bit and sampling rates
COMAND supportsMP3 files of the following
types:
Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s
to 320 kbit/s
Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
COMAND supportsWMA files of the
following types:
Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s
Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
COMAND does not supportWMA files of the
following types:
RDRM (Digital Rights Management)
encrypted files
i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a
noticeable deterioration in quality. This is
especially the case if you have activated a
surround sound function.
Notes on copyright
MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or play
back are generally subject to copyright
protection in accordance with the applicable
international and national regulations.
In many countries, reproductions, even for
private use, are not permitted without the
prior consent of the copyright holder.
Make sure that you knowabout the applicable
copyright regulations and that you comply
with these.
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your
own compositions and recordings, or if the
copyright holder has granted you permission,
these restrictions do not apply.
Notes on CDs/DVDs
Discs with copy protection are not
compatible with the audio CD standard and
therefore may not be able to be played by
COMAND.
Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs. There is a wide range of data
carriers, disc-writing software and writers
available. This variety means that there is no
guarantee that the system will be able to play
discs that you have copied yourself.
There may be playback problems if you play
CDs that you have copied yourself with a
storage capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs
of this type do not conform to the currently
applicable standards.
i On many DVD audio discs, the last track does not contain any music and COMAND
then switches to the next disc. This is
normal systembehavior and does notmean
that there is a malfunction.
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. They could peel off and damage the drive.
The drive is designed to hold discs which
comply with the EN 60908 standard.
Therefore, you can only use discs with a
maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that
contain data on both sides (DVD on one
side and audio data on the other), they
cannot be ejected and can damage the
drive.
Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm,
even with an adapter. Only use round discs
with a diameter of 12 cm.
i COMAND is able to play back audio CDs in multichannel audio format.
Music search
Calling up a category list
X Switch on an audio source and call up the
basic display, e.g. CD mode (Y page 158).
Music search 165
A u d io
Z
X Select Search by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears.
Category list
The categories are displayed according to the
data available. The categories Current
Tracklist, Folder, Playlists (if available)
and Photos (if available) are already
assigned. The other available categories are
filled by the music search.
Selecting a category
Starting a music search
If you select a category that contains no
content from the category list, the music
search starts.
The music search finds tracks via all available
media. The search begins with the audio
source that is currently active.
The following media are included for the
music search:
Rdisc mode (audio CD/DVD/MP3)
Rmemory card
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
X Select a category in the category list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The Reading Data... message appears.
The searchmay take some time, depending
on the number of tracks available.
The Track information is complete
message appears once the search is
completed. Playback then starts with the
previously active audio source.
X To cancel the music search: confirm
Cancel by pressingW.
Selecting an album
X Select Albums in the category list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The available albums are displayed
alphabetically. If there is a cover available
for an album, it is displayed in front of the
album name.
Selecting a track
X Select Tracks in the category list
(Y page 165) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The available tracks are displayed.
166 Music search A u d io
X Select a track and pressW to confirm. Playback starts.
Selecting a year of publication
X Select Year in the category list
(Y page 165) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select an entry and pressW to confirm. The genre list is displayed.
X Select a genre, e.g. pop, and pressW to confirm.
The track list is displayed.
X Select a track and pressW to confirm. Playback starts.
Selecting a cover
X Select Select By Cover in the category
list (Y page 165) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The available covers are displayed in
alphabetical order of the artists.
X Select the desired cover by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The corresponding album is played.
Selection via keyword search
X Select Keyword Search in the category list
(Y page 165) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu appears.
X Enter characters and confirm the entry.
Instructions for entering characters can be
found in the "Entering characters in the
phone book and address book" section
(Y page 31).
Depending on the entry, the hits are shown
in a list.
Music search 167
A u d io
Z
X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select an entry, e.g. Artists, and press
W to confirm. The album and cover (if available) are
displayed.
X Confirm the album withW. The tracks on the album are displayed.
X Select a track and pressW to confirm. Playback starts and the basic display
appears.
MUSIC REGISTER
General information
You can store music files in a compressed
format in the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 169). The memory has a capacity of
10 GB.
! Retain the original music files in a secure location. If you, for example, accidentally
reset COMAND to the factory settings with
the reset function, all music files in the
MUSIC REGISTER are deleted. Mercedes-
Benz is not liable for any loss of data.
Switching to MUSIC REGISTER
Option 1
X Press theh function button repeatedly
until the MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
Rmemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth audio mode
168 MUSIC REGISTER A u d io
If music files are available, playback begins at
the point last listened to.
If there are no music files, you will see a
message to this effect.
X Confirm the message by pressingW the COMAND controller and copy the music
files (Y page 169).
Option 2
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If MUSIC REGISTER was the last mode
selected, it is now switched on.
If another audio source is switched on, you
can now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER in
the audio menu.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears.
X Select Music Register and pressW to confirm.
Option 3
X Press ther number key (DVD changer).
The MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.
Importing music files
Introduction
You can copy music files in the file formats
MP3, WMA and AAC (with the file
extensions .m4p, .m4a, .m4b and .aac) from
the following media:
Rdiscs in the DVD changer
Rmemory card
RUSB storage device
i CD information such as album name, disc name, artist and track is provided by the
Gracenote Media Database (Y page 161).
X Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 157).
X With an audio CD inserted, select REC in the
CD basic display by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Step 1: selecting tracks to import
X Select Track(s) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
: To record all music files (standard)
; To record individual tracksO
= To confirm your selection
If you do not select any tracks, every track on
the CD will be imported.
Step 2: selecting the target folder
X Select Folder by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
MUSIC REGISTER 169
A u d io
Z
: To create a new folder (standard)
; Existing folders
= Currently selected folder
X Select a folder by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
If you do not select a target folder, a new one
will be created.
Step 3: beginning the import
X Select Start by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Information about the import source and
target as well as the progress is displayed.
The Audio CD basic display automatically
appears after successful import.
X To cancel importing: during importing,
confirm Cancel by pressingW the COMAND controller.
The Audio CD basic display appears.
Deleting all music files
This function deletes all music files from the
MUSIC REGISTER.
! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not use COMAND during this time.
X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).
X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Delete All Music Files and
pressW to confirm.
A query appears. No is highlighted.
If you select Yes, all music files are deleted.
You see the Please Wait... message.
Then, you see the Deletion Procedure
Successful message.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
Calling up memory space info
X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).
X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Memory Info and pressW to confirm.
The following is displayed:
Rstorage capacity
Ravailable memory
Roccupied memory
Rcontent (folders, tracks)
Music search
The music search finds tracks via all available
media. The search begins with the audio
source that is currently active.
The following media are included for the
music search:
Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3)
Rmemory card
170 MUSIC REGISTER A u d io
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).
X Select Search by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears.
X Select a track in a category (Y page 165).
Example: opening a folder
X Select Folder in the category list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You see the contents of the current folder.
The name of the current folder is at the top
and the track currently playing is indicated by
a# dot.
X To switch to the next folder up: press the
% back button or slide XV the COMAND controller.
Changing the folder/track name
X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).
X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Rename/Delete Files and press
W to confirm.
X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.
X Select Options by slidingVY and press W to confirm.
X Select Change and pressW to confirm.
X Enter a name for the folder/track.
Instructions for entering characters can be
found in the "Entering characters in the
phone book and address book" section
(Y page 31).
X To save the changes: select and
pressW to confirm.
Deleting folders/tracks
X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).
X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Rename/Delete Files and press
W to confirm.
X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.
X Select Options by slidingVY and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete and pressW to confirm.
A query appears. No is highlighted.
If you select Yes, the folders/tracks are
deleted. You see the Please wait...
message. Then, you see the Data
Deleted message.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
Playback options
The following options are available:
RNormal Track Sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
RRandom Medium
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order.
RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only)
The tracks in the currently active folder/
track list are played in a random order.
MUSIC REGISTER 171
A u d io
Z
X To select options: switch to the MUSIC
REGISTER (Y page 168).
X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The options list appears. The# dot indicates the option selected.
X Select an option and pressW to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal Track Sequence, you will
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window.
i The Normal Track Sequence option is automatically selected when you change
the disc you are currently listening to or
when you select a different medium. If an
option is selected, it remains selected after
COMAND is switched on or off.
Bluetooth audio mode
Connecting Bluetooth audio devices
Conditions
Bluetooth audio device
Bluetooth audio mode requires a
Bluetooth-capable audio device.
i Not all Bluetooth audio devices available on the market are equally suitable. For
more detailed information on suitable
Bluetooth audio devices and on
connecting Bluetooth audio devices to
COMAND, visit
http://www.mbusa-mobile.com (for
USA). Alternatively, call theMercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(for USA) or Customer Relations at
1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
Before using Bluetooth audio mode, you
should check your Bluetooth audio device
for the following (see the Bluetooth audio
device's operating instructions):
RBluetooth audio profile
The Bluetooth audio device must support
the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth audio
profiles.
RBluetooth visibility
On certain Bluetooth audio devices, as
well as activating the Bluetooth function,
the device itself must also be made
"visible" to other devices (see the
Bluetooth audio device's operating
instructions).
RBluetooth device name
This device name is predetermined but can
usually be changed. To make a clear
selection of the Bluetooth device
possible, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you customize the device name (see
the Bluetooth audio device's operating
instructions).
i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio
data transmission
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
Profile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio
data playback
X Activate Bluetooth and Bluetooth
visibility on the Bluetooth audio device.
On COMAND
X Activate the Bluetooth function in
COMAND (Y page 45).
General information
Before using your Bluetooth audio device
with COMAND for the first time, you will need
to authorize it.
When you authorize a new Bluetooth audio
device, it is connected automatically.
Connection involves first searching for a
172 Bluetooth audio mode A u d io
Bluetooth audio device and then authorizing
it.
You can authorize up to fifteen Bluetooth
devices.
i If you authorize a mobile phone that
supports Bluetooth audio, the A2DP and
AVRCP Bluetooth audio profiles are
connected automatically. The mobile
phone is then entered in both the
Bluetooth telephone list (Y page 116) and
in the Bluetooth device list (Y page 173).
Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a
mobile phone in Bluetooth telephony
(Y page 116).
Searching for and authorizing a
Bluetooth audio device
X Switch on Bluetooth audio mode
(Y page 175).
If you see the No Bluetooth Audio
Device Authorized message, you will
need to connect the Bluetooth audio
device first.
X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List
by pressingW the COMAND controller.
X To search: confirm Update by pressing
W the COMAND controller.
COMAND searches for Bluetooth audio
devices within range and adds them to the
Bluetooth device list. Bluetooth audio
devices are detected if they support the
Bluetooth audio profiles (A2DP, AVRCP).
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth audio devices within
range and their characteristics.
Example: Bluetooth device list
: Newly detected mobile phone with
Bluetooth audio function in range
; Bluetooth audio player not within range
but previously authorized (icon appears in
gray)
The Bluetooth device list displays all
authorized devices, whether they are within
range or not. After a device search, devices
which are within range but not authorized are
also displayed.
i With some Bluetooth audio devices, playback must be initially started on the
device itself, so that COMAND can play the
audio data.
X To authorize: select an unauthorized
Bluetooth audio device from the list
(example::) by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X Select the symbol to the right of the
Bluetooth audio device by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Authorize and pressW to confirm.
Depending on the Bluetooth audio device
used, you now have two options for
continuing with authorization.
X Option 1: enter the passkey. To do so,
proceed as described in the "Authorizing
(registering) a mobile phone" section
(Y page 117).
After successful authorization, the
Bluetooth audio device is connected and
starts playing.
Bluetooth audio mode 173
A u d io
Z
X Option 2 (Secure Simple Pairing): if the
digit codes displayed in COMAND and on
the Bluetooth audio device are the same,
confirm Yes by pressingW.
If you select Yes, authorization continues
and the Bluetooth audio device is
connected. Playback starts.
If you select No, authorization will be
canceled.
i The Bluetooth audio device must
support the Bluetooth version 2.1 for
connection via Secure Simple Pairing.
COMAND creates a six-digit code, which is
displayed on the two devices that are to be
connected.
X External authorization: COMAND may
not be able to locate your Bluetooth audio
device due to the specific security settings
of the Bluetooth audio device itself. In this
case, checkwhether your Bluetooth audio
device can locate the COMAND system
(Y page 118). The Bluetooth device name
of COMAND is MB Bluetooth.
After successful authorization, the
Bluetooth audio device is connected and
starts playing.
Reconnecting a Bluetooth audio
device
The Bluetooth audio profiles are connected
automatically under the following
circumstances:
Rone of the last two mobile phones to have
been connected has also been used as a
Bluetooth audio player (if this function is
supported by the mobile phone).
Rthe mobile phone takes over the automatic
connection itself.
A Bluetooth audio player without telephone
functions is not automatically reconnected,
even if it was the last device connected.
If the No Bluetooth Audio Device
Connected message appears, you have two
options to connect a Bluetooth audio
device:
Option 1
X Confirm Connect Last Device in the
basic display by pressingW the COMAND controller.
If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth
audio device, it will be connected and will
start playing.
i With some Bluetooth audio devices, playback must be initially started on the
device itself, so that COMAND can play the
audio data.
Option 2
X Select BT Audio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List
by pressingW the COMAND controller.
X Select a Bluetooth audio device by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth
audio device, it will be connected and will
start playing.
i With some Bluetooth audio devices, playback must be initially started on the
device itself, so that COMAND can play the
audio data.
Bluetooth audio device and
simultaneous search for mobile phones
During the search for mobile phones
(Y page 116), the connection with the
Bluetooth audio device is terminated. In the
Bluetooth audio basic display
(Y page 176), you will see the Received
Business Cards message and the
Received Business Cards menu item
cannot be selected.
174 Bluetooth audio mode A u d io
Displaying details
X Select a Bluetooth audio device in the
Bluetooth device list.
X Select the symbol to the right of the
Bluetooth audio device by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
RBluetooth name
RBluetooth address
Ravailability status (shown after an
update)
Rauthorization status
X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller.
De-authorizing (de-registering) a
Bluetooth audio device
X Select a Bluetooth audio device in the
Bluetooth device list.
X Select the symbol to the right of the
Bluetooth audio device by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select De-Authorize and pressW to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to de-authorize this device.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth device list.
If you select No, the processwill be aborted.
i Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth
audio device, you should also delete the
device name MB Bluetooth from your
Bluetooth audio device's Bluetooth list
(see the Bluetooth audio device's
operating instructions).
Switching to Bluetooth audio mode
Option 1
X Connect (Y page 172) or reconnect
(Y page 174) a Bluetooth audio device.
COMAND activates the Bluetooth audio
device. The basic display appears and the
device starts playing.
Option 2
X Press theh function button one ormore
times.
i By pressing the function button
repeatedly, you can change the operating
mode in the following order:
Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
Rmemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth audio mode
Option 3
X Select Bluetooth Audio (Y page 159) in
themedia list by turningcVd theCOMAND controller and pressW to confirm. COMAND activates the connected device.
You will see a message to this effect. The
basic display then appears.
Bluetooth audio mode 175
A u d io
Z
Example: Bluetooth audio basic display
: Track name
; Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
= Album name
? Sound settings
A Media list
B Artist
C To stop or start playback
D To connect a Bluetooth audio device or
increase the volume using COMAND
E Bluetooth audio data medium type
F Data medium position in the media list
i If the Bluetooth audio device connected supportsmetadata and corresponding data
is available, then the artist, track and album
name can be displayed.
Starting/stopping playback
X To start playback: select by sliding
V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Playback starts. Selection is at.
X To stop playback: select by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A message appears. Selection is at.
X To continue playback: select by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A message appears. Selection is at.
Starting playback if the Bluetooth
audio device has been stopped
During the search for mobile phones
(Y page 116), the connection with the
Bluetooth audio device is terminated. In the
Bluetooth audio basic display (Y page 176),
you will see the No Bluetooth Audio
Device Connected message and the
Connect Last Devicemenu item cannot be
selected.
When the search is finished, the Bluetooth
audio device can be reconnected.
X Confirm Connect Last Device by
pressingW.
Depending on the Bluetooth audio device
used, playback starts immediately or you
must start playback manually.
In this case, you will see the Bluetooth
Audio Device Paused message.
X To start playback: select by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Playback resumes from the beginning.
176 Bluetooth audio mode A u d io
Selecting a track
This function is not supported by all
Bluetooth audio devices.
X To skip forwards or backwards to a
track: press theE orF button on
COMAND.
or
X Press the9 or: button briefly on
the multifunction steering wheel.
X Rapid scroll: press and hold the9 or: button on the multifunction
steering wheel until the desired track is
reached.
If you hold down the9 or: button,
the system runs through the list more
quickly.
Selecting playback options
If the Bluetooth audio device supports the
corresponding function, the following options
are available:
RNormal Track Sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Audio data playback is determined by the
order in which the tracks are written to the
data carrier. Alphabetical order is the most
common. Once all the tracks in a folder
have been played, the tracks in the next
folder are played.
RRandom Tracks
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The# dot indicates the option selected.
X Select the option by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
If you select Random Tracks, you will see
a corresponding symbol in the display/
selection window.
Adjusting the sound settings
The sound settings are described using radio
mode as an example in the "Basic functions
of COMAND" section (Y page 34).
Increasing the volumeusingCOMAND
X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Volume and pressW to confirm. A menu appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.
X Select Standard or Boost and pressW to confirm.
You will find further information in the "Audio
AUX mode" section (Y page 182).
Bluetooth audio mode 177
A u d io
Z
Media Interface mode
Connection options
Overview
The connection sockets are located in the
stowage compartment in the center console.
Device-specific adapter cables, included with
the Media Interface, are required to connect
external devices to the Media Interface.
i Store individual parts in a safe place.
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz
connection cables.
You can connect the following data media to
COMAND via the Media Interface:
RiPod
Rcertain MP3 players
i iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California, USA.
Supported devices
For details and a list of supported devices,
visit http://www.mbusa-mobile.com.
Alternatively, call the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(for USA) or Customer Relations at
1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
Connecting an external device
i Do not leave external devices in the vehicle, as their correct function cannot be
guaranteed if they are subjected to
extreme temperatures, e.g. from exposure
to direct sunlight or very low outside
temperatures (see the operating
instructions of the respective device).
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC accepts no
liability for damage to external devices.
Never connect more than one device at a
time. You will otherwise not be able to play
back from the external device.
: Four-pin socket for inch stereo jack,
e.g. for MP3 players (audio and video)
; iPod plug for connecting an iPod
= USB socket for connecting an MP3 player
? Example of device: iPod
X Connect the external device with suitable
socket:,; or=.
COMAND activates the device; a message
appears.
If you remove a device, the No Device
Connected message appears.
i A connected iPod or MP3 player should not be simultaneously operated via the
Media Interface and the remote control
(e.g. Bluetooth remote control) or directly
on the device itself as this may cause
unforeseen technical difficulties.
i Connecting a fully discharged iPod or MP3 player can result in an extended
initialization period.
Malfunction messages appear while the
device is being activated if:
RCOMAND does not support the device
connected (External Device
Unavailable message).
Rthe connected device consumes too much
power.
Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty.
Ra mass storage device (e.g. USB stick or
USB hard disk) is connected to the Media
Interface (Please Connect The Device
To The Other USB Port message).
178 Media Interface mode A u d io
i The separate USB connection ensures quick access and expanded media content
options.
i Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you have further questions.
Switching to Media Interface mode
General information
In extreme cases, starting up individual
functions can take up to several minutes
this depends on the external device and its
content (e.g. video podcasts).
Only use the original software to save files on
iPods or MP3 players. Otherwise, some or all
functions may not be available.
Option 1
X Connect an external device (Y page 178).
COMAND activates the device. The basic
display then appears.
Option 2
The external device is connected to theMedia
Interface.
X Press theh function button one ormore
times.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
Rmemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth audio mode
Option 3
X Press thei number button.
This selects the connected external audio
device directly.
Option 4
X In the media list (Y page 159), select the
entry at position 0 by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
COMAND activates the connected device.
You will see a message to this effect. The
basic display then appears.
If no device is connected, you will see the
Media Int. entry instead of a device
name.
Media Interface mode (iPod mode) when equipped with a DVD changer
: Type of data medium
; Track number
= Elapsed track time (also in format
00:00:00 for audio books)
? Track name
A Graphic time display
B Graphic track display
C Sound settings
D Media list
E Album name (if available)
F Music search
G Position in the media list
H Artist (if available)
I Playback options
Type of device: connected is indicated by
the corresponding symbol for iPod or MP3
player.
Media Interface mode 179
A u d io
Z
The current playback option (Y page 163) is
shown with a symbol behind album name
E (no display for Normal Track Sequence).
i If the device connected does not contain any playable tracks, a message appears to
this effect.
Selecting music files
Note
COMAND displays the data stored on the
iPod or MP3 player according to the filing
structure used in the respective medium.
Selecting by skipping to a track
X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.
or
X Press theE orF button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track. The skip back function skips to the
beginning of the current track if the track
has been playing for more than eight
seconds. If the track has been playing for
less than eight seconds, it skips to the start
of the previous track. If you have selected
a playback option other than Normal
Track Sequence, the track sequence is
random.
Selecting using the number keypad
X To make an entry: press thel button.
An input menu appears. The number of
characters available for input depends on
the number of stored tracks.
X To enter a track number: press a number
key, e.g.q.
The digit is entered in the first position in
the input line.
i COMAND will ignore and not display an invalid digit.
X Enter more numbers if desired.
The track plays after the last possible
number is entered.
i Pressing and holding a number key for more than two seconds completes the
entry, and the corresponding track is
played.
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X While the display/selection window is
active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position has
been reached.
or
X Press and hold theF orE button
until the desired position is reached.
i On an iPod/iPhone, fast rewind only functions within the current track.
Selecting a category/playlist/folder
Overview
iPod and certain MP3 players
For an iPod or MP3 player, you can select
tracks using categories or folders.
Depending on the device connected, the
following categories may be available, for
example:
RCurrent Tracklist
RPlaylists (e.g. All)
RArtists
RAlbums
RTracks
RPodcasts
RGenres
RComposers
RAudiobooks
i Some playback categories contain the entry All. If this entry has been selected,
the entire content of the category selected
will be played.
180 Media Interface mode A u d io
Calling up a category list
X Select Search in the basic display by
slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.
i The Search menu item is not available until the device has been activated.
Example: category list
X Select Current Tracklist by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The content of the current track list
appears.
Example: current track list
: Symbol for next folder up
; Device icon and device name
= Track symbol
? Current title
X Select the track by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The track is played.
X To switch to the next folder up: slide
XV the COMAND controller or press the % button.
Playing back the content of a category
or folder
X Select the category or folder by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X PressW the COMAND controller for longer than two seconds.
The content of the category or folder
selected is played in accordance with the
playback option (Y page 163) selected.
Alphabetical track selection
iPod and MP3 players
This function is available for alphabetically
sorted categories and folders. This function
is not available for albums or playlists, for
example.
X Select a category, e.g. Artists, by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available artists are displayed.
X Press the corresponding number key once
or several times to select the first letter of
the artist's name (e.g. for an artist
beginning with the letter "C", press number
keyl three times).
The available letters are listed at the lower
edge of the display.
After a message, the first entry in the list
which matches the letter entered is
highlighted.
i If no corresponding entry exists, the last entry corresponding to a previous letter is
highlighted instead.
i For iPods and MP3 players, the quality of the search results is highly dependent on
the version and language variant of the
software (e.g. iTunes version) used to
populate the device.
Media Interface mode 181
A u d io
Z
If different sorting rules are defined (e.g. in
iTunes), the search is canceled without
any result.
Playback options
The following options are available:
RNormal Track Sequence
Normal track sequence: you hear the
tracks in their normal order (e.g. numerical
or alphabetical).
RRandom Medium
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order.
RRandom Track List
The tracks in the currently active category
or folder, including any subfolders, are
played in random order.
i For MP3 players, the random playlists offer a maximum of 300 tracks chosen at
random.
X To select a playback option: select
Media Interface in the basic display by
slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The options list appears. The# dot indicates the option selected.
X Select an option and pressW to confirm.
MP3 player instructions
Data formats
MP3 andWMA are supported as data formats
with fixed and variable bit rates (up to
320 kbits/s).
Special considerationswhen usingMP3
players
Up to eight directory levels with up to 1000
tracks per directory are supported.
Do not use USB extension leads or adapters.
They can impair functionality.
i DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected files are not supported by the
Media Interface.
Audio AUX mode
Notes on audio AUX mode
You can connect an external audio source
(AUX) to COMAND. The socket for this is
located in the glove box.
If COMAND is equipped with a Media
Interface, external audio sources are
connected using the corresponding cable set.
An AUX socket is not provided. The
connections for the Media Interface are
located in the stowage compartment in the
center console.
i You will find further information online at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or
Customer Relations at 1-800-387-0100
(for Canada).
Activating audio AUX mode
When you connect an external audio source,
audio AUX is not selected automatically.
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If AUX mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
If another audio source is switched on, you
can now switch to audio AUX mode in the
audio menu.
X Select Audio using ZV and pressW to confirm.
The audio menu appears.
182 Audio AUX mode A u d io
X Select Aux using cVd and pressW to confirm.
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium
in the external audio source is played, if the
source is connected and playback
selected.
Please see the respective operating
instructions for how to operate the external
audio source.
You will find details on volume (Y page 33)
and sound (Y page 34) settings in the "At a
glance" section.
G WARNING
External audio sources may have different
volumes, which can mean that system
messages such as traffic announcements and
navigation system announcements are much
louder. If necessary, please deactivate the
system messages or adjust their volume
manually.
Increasing the volumeusingCOMAND
In some cases, the volume of the external
audio device may be quieter or louder, or the
usual maximum possible volume may be
lower. On some devices, it is possible to
adjust the volume separately. In this case,
start at a medium volume and increase it
gradually. This enables you to determine
whether the system is able to play the music
at high volume without distorting it.
X Select Volume in the AUX display by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.
X Select Standard or Boost and pressW to confirm.
Standard: the volume of the external audio
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost: the volume of the external audio
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
Audio AUX mode 183
A u d io
Z
184
COMAND features ............................. 186
General information ......................... 186
Basic settings .................................... 186
Video DVD mode ............................... 186
AUX video mode ................................ 192
Picture viewer ................................... 193
185
V id e o
COMAND features
These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND system at the time of
purchase. Country-specific deviations are
possible. Please note that your COMAND
system may not be equipped with all the
features described.
General information
Automatic picture shutoff
The video image is only displayed if the
selector lever of the transmission is in
position P.
If the selector lever of the transmission is
changed from position P, the In order not
to distract you from the traffic
situation, the picture is faded out
while the vehicle is in motion.
message appears
As soon as the selector lever of the
transmission is returned to position P, the
video image is shown.
Basic settings
Picture settings
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or
color
X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.
X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Changing the picture format
X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.
X Select 16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or
Widescreen and pressW to confirm. The dot in front of the entry indicates the
currently selected format.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Video DVD mode
Safety notes
G WARNING
COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser
product. You must not open the casing. If you
open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or
damaged, there is a risk of exposure to
invisible laser radiation. This may damage
your eyes, or those of others.
COMAND does not contain any parts that can
be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,
all maintenance work must be carried out by
qualified aftersales technicians.
G WARNING
Only when the vehicle is stationary should
you:
Rload a disc
Reject a disc
There is a risk of being distracted from the
road and traffic conditions if this is done while
the vehicle is in motion.
186 Video DVD mode V id e o
Notes about discs
Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs. There are a large variety of
discs, DVD authoring software, writing
software and writers available. This variety
means that there is no guarantee that the
systemwill be able to play discs that you have
copied yourself.
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs, as they could peel off and damage
COMAND. Stickers can cause the disc to
bend, which can result in read errors and
disc recognition problems.
! COMAND is designed to accommodate discs which comply with the EN 60908
standard. You can therefore only use discs
with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that
contain data on both sides (DVD on one
side and audio data on the other), they
cannot be ejected and can damage
COMAND.
Use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm.
Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm,
even with an adapter.
DVD playback conditions
If video DVDs do not conform to the NTSC or
PAL TV standards, they may create picture,
sound or other problems during playback.
COMAND can play back video DVDs
produced according to the following
standards:
Rregion code 1 or region code 0 (no region
code)
RPAL or NTSC standard
You will generally find the relevant details
either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.
i If you insert a video DVD with a different region code, you will see a message to this
effect.
i COMAND is set to region code 1 at the factory. This setting can be changed at an
authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. This will
allow you to play video DVDs with a
different region code, provided that they
are produced in accordance with the PAL
or NTSC standard. The region code can be
changed up to five times.
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that
certain functions or actions will be
temporarily blocked ormay not function at all.
As soon as you try to activate these functions
or actions, you will see theK symbol in the display.
Inserting and removing DVDs
X Proceed as described in the "Inserting and
ejecting CDs and DVDs" section
(Y page 154).
Switching to video DVD mode
Option 1
X DVD changer: insert a video DVD.
X Press theh function button or the
% back button.
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
starts to play it.
Option 2
X Press theh function button one ormore
times.
COMAND switches to the previous disc
operating mode.
Video DVD mode 187
V id e o
Z
i By pressing this function button
repeatedly, you can change the operating
mode in the following order:
Raudio CD/DVD, video DVD or MP3 disc
in the DVD changer
Rmemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth audio mode
X Select Media by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select a video DVD from the media list
(Y page 190).
Option 3
X Select Video in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Video DVD mode is switched on.
Hiding/showing the navigation menu
X To display: slide ZV the COMAND controller.
i This function is not available while the DVD's own menu (Y page 190) is being
displayed.
X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller.
or
X Wait for approximately eight seconds.
Navigation menu displayed
: Disc type
; Current title
= Current scene
? Track time
A To show the menu
Showing/hiding the menu
This function is not available while the DVD's
own menu (Y page 190) is being displayed.
X To display: in full-screen mode, pressW the COMAND controller.
or
X Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and pressW to confirm.
X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
and confirm Full Screen by pressingW.
Menu shown
: Video DVD options
; Pause function
= Stop function
188 Video DVD mode V id e o
? Media selection
A Sound settings
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X In full-screenmode, slide XVY and hold the COMAND controller until the desired
position has been reached.
or
X Press and hold theE orF button
until the desired position is reached.
You see the navigation menu.
Stop function
X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X To interrupt playback: select by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The display changes to. The
video image is hidden.
X To continue playback: select and
pressW to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
X To stop playback: while playback is
interrupted, select again and press
W to confirm.
or
X During playback, confirm by pressing
W twice in rapid succession. is highlighted.
X To restart playback: confirm the selection by pressingW. Playback restarts from the beginning.
Pause function
X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X To pause playback: select by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The display changes to.
X To continue playback: select and
pressW to confirm. The menu is hidden.
Selecting a scene/chapter
If the film is divided into scenes or chapters,
you can select them directly while the film is
running, or skip forwards step-by-step. Some
DVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g.
during the opening credits).
It may also be possible to select the scene/
chapter from within the menu stored on the
DVD.
X To skip forwards or back: in full-screen
mode, turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller.
or
X Press theE orF button on the
control panel.
The navigation menu (Y page 188) appears
for approximately eight seconds.
Selecting a film/title
This function is only available if the DVD is
divided into several films/titles. If the DVD
contains several films, these can be selected
directly. A film can be selected either when
the DVD is being played back or when it is
stopped.
The film can also be selected from the menu
on the DVD itself.
Video DVD mode 189
V id e o
Z
X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Title Selection by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select a film/title and pressW to confirm.
Selecting a video DVD from themedia
list
X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X Select Changer or Media by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The media list appears. The# dot indicates the currentmediumbeing played.
Video DVDs are indicated by the icon.
X Equipped with a DVD changer: pressW the COMAND controller to display all
magazine trays.
X Select a video DVD by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
COMAND loads the video DVD and begins
playing it.
i If you select a CD, an audio DVD or an MP3 medium, you switch to the respective
audio mode. You can find further
information about the media list on
(Y page 159).
DVD menu
Calling up the DVD menu
TheDVDmenu is themenu stored on theDVD
itself. It is structured in various ways
according to the individual DVD and permits
certain actions and settings.
In the case of multi-language DVDs, for
example, you can change the DVD language
in the DVD menu.
X In full-screen mode, pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.
X Select Menu and pressW to confirm. The DVD menu appears.
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
X Select a menu item by sliding ZV or turning XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The menu appears.
i Menu items which cannot be selected are shown in gray.
190 Video DVD mode V id e o
X To reconfirm your selection: confirm
Select by pressingW.
COMAND executes the action.
Make a selection from the further options,
if necessary.
COMAND then switches back to the DVD
menu.
i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: Back (to movie), Play,
Stop,.,/ or Go Up may not
function or may not function at certain
points in the DVD menu. To indicate this,
theK icon appears in the display.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu
X Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu and pressW the COMAND controller to confirm.
or
X Select any menu item in the DVDmenu and
pressW the COMAND controller to confirm.
X Select Go Up and pressW to confirm.
Back to the film
X Press the% back button repeatedly
until you see the movie.
or
X Select the corresponding menu item from
the DVD menu.
X Select the Back (to movie)menu item in
the menu and pressW to confirm.
Setting the language and audio
format
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it
is available, you can set the DVD menu
language, the audio language or the audio
format. The number of settings is determined
by the DVD content. It is possible that the
settings may also be accessed in the DVD
menu (Y page 190).
X In full-screen mode, pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.
X Select Menu Language or Audio
Language and pressW to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few
seconds. The# dot in front of an entry indicates the currently selected language.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Subtitles and camera angle
These functions are not available on all DVDs.
The number of subtitle languages and camera
angles available depends on the content of
the DVD. It is possible that the settings may
also be accessed in the DVD menu
(Y page 190).
X In full-screen mode, pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.
X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and
pressW to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears. The# dot in front of an entry indicates the current
setting.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Video DVD mode 191
V id e o
Z
Interactive content
DVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. a
video game). In a video game, for example,
you may be able to influence events by
selecting and triggering actions. The type and
number of actions depend on the DVD.
X Select an action by slidingZV orXVY the COMAND controller and pressW to execute it.
A menu appears and the first entry,
Select, is highlighted.
X PressW the COMAND controller.
AUX video mode
Connecting external video sources
If your vehicle is equipped with a Media
Interface (Y page 178), you can connect an
external video source (AUX video).
The 1/8 inch audio/video jacks are in the
center console stowage compartment.
i In vehicles with a rear view camera, the AUX video jack cannot be used for external
video sources.
Switching to AUX video mode
X Select Video in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If AUX video mode was the last mode
selected, it will now be active.
If another video source is switched on, you
can now switch to AUX video mode in the
video menu.
X Select Video and pressW to confirm.
X Select Aux and pressW to confirm. The AUX video menu appears. You will hear
and see the content of the external video
source if it is connected and switched to
playback.
AUX video mode
For details on how to operate the external
video source, see the respective device's
operating instructions.
Showing/hiding the menu
X To show: pressW the COMAND controller.
X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
and confirm Full Screen by pressingW.
Volume and sound settings
You will find details on volume (Y page 33)
and sound (Y page 34) settings in the "At a
glance" section.
G WARNING
External video sources may have different
volumes, which can mean that system
messages such as traffic announcements and
navigation system announcements are much
louder. If necessary, please deactivate the
system messages or adjust their volume
manually.
i It may be the case that a device which is connected as an external video source
seems quieter or louder in the vehicle, or
that the usual maximum volume cannot be
reached. On some devices, it is possible to
adjust the volume separately. In this case,
start at a medium volume and increase it
gradually. This enables you to determine
192 AUX video mode V id e o
whether the system is able to play the
sound at high volume without distorting it.
Increasing the volumeusingCOMAND
X Select Volume in the AUX display by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.
X Select Standard or Boost and pressW to confirm.
Standard: the volume of the external video
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost: the volume of the external video
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
Picture viewer
Introduction
If there are pictures on the active data
medium, you can look at them.
Data medium Supported picture
formats
CD/DVD with
picture files
jpeg, jpg
USB devices (sticks,
hard drives)
SD memory card:
jpeg, jpg
Calling up a category list
X Select a data medium (e.g. memory card)
with pictures in the audio menu
(Y page 144) or in the media list
(Y page 159).
X Select Search in the basic display by
slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.
Displaying pictures
X Select (Y page 166) Photos in the
category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A folder directory appears.
X Select a folder with photos and pressW to confirm.
The folder displays the existing picture files
(example).
X Select a photo and pressW to confirm. The photo is displayed and the music is
stopped.
Changing the picture view
X PressW the COMAND controller. A menu appears.
Picture viewer 193
V id e o
Z
X To turn the picture clockwise: confirm
Turn Clockwise by pressingW the COMAND controller.
X To turn the picture counter-clockwise:
select Turn Counterclockwise by
turning the cVd COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X To zoom into a picture: select Zoom by
turning the cVd COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. After you have zoomed into the picture, you
can move the section of the picture.
X Slide ZV and XVY the COMAND controller.
X To return to the original size: pressW the COMAND controller.
Exiting the picture viewer
X Select Back To Menu in the menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X To start playing music: confirm Search
by pressingW. The category list appears (Y page 165).
X Select a category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select other entries within the category
(e.g. track, album) until the music starts
playing.
194 Picture viewer V id e o
COMAND features ............................. 196
SIRIUS Weather ................................ 196
195
W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
COMAND features
These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND system at the time of
purchase. Country-specific deviations are
possible. Please note that your COMAND
system may not be equipped with all the
features described.
SIRIUS Weather
Introduction
For the reception of weather forecasts via
satellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM
Satellite Weather subscription.
When the Call SIRIUS to activate
system at 888-539-7474messagewith the
SIRIUS device identification number appears,
you will first have to obtain access to the
weather service. A description of the
procedure can be found in the "Registering
satellite radio" section (Y page 149).
COMAND can receive weather forecasts via
satellite radio for the entire USA (including
Alaska and Hawaii). The received weather
data can be displayed as an information chart
(daily forecast, five-day forecast, detail
information) or on the weather map.
The weather data received from a weather
station is stored in COMAND for an hour and
can be shown again immediately after
restarting the engine (e.g. after refueling).
The weather map can display the following
weather data with symbols:
Rrain radar
Rstorm characteristics
Rareas of high-pressure/low-pressure,
weather fronts
Rcourse of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,
typhoons)
Rwind direction and speeds
i The rain radar cannot be displayed for Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.
i Hurricane: description of a tropical cyclone which mostly develop in the
Atlantic Ocean or in the North Pacific
Ocean or South Pacific Ocean. The wind
speeds are above 74 mph (118 km/h). To
characterize the strength of a hurricane,
there are five categories.
Typhoon: the description of a tropical
cyclone that develops in the North West
Pacific Ocean. The wind speeds are in the
category of a hurricane.
Switching the SIRIUS weather display
on/off
Switching on
X Select the globe icon in the main function
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
The SIRIUS weather basic display appears.
X Confirm SIRIUS Weather by pressingW. The information chart shows the daily
forecast at the current vehicle position.
196 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
Daily forecast as an information chart (example)
You see the following information:
Rthe date and time of the weather message
received last
Rinformation on the current weather
(temperature, cloud cover) and forecast for
the next 3, 6, 12 hours
Rthe current highest temperature and
forecasts
Rthe current lowest temperature and
forecasts
Rthe probability of rain
X To switch to the five-day forecast:
confirm 5-Day by pressingW. The information chart displays the forecast
for the next five days in the currently
selected location.
Five-day forecast as an information chart (example)
X To return to the daily forecast: confirm
Current by pressingW.
Switching off
X Press the% button.
or
X Select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and confirm by pressingW. Both options appear in the SIRIUS weather
basic menu.
Displaying detailed information
Besides the current temperatures, you can
display information such as wind speeds and
UV index.
X Select Info in the information chart by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The information chart shows detailed
information for the selected area.
Selecting the area for the weather
forecast
Introduction
You can select the following areas:
Rthe current vehicle position
Rvicinity of the destination
Ra winter sports area
Ran area within the USA
You can select an area in the information
chart (first option), on the map (second
option) or from the memory, if you have
SIRIUS Weather 197
W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
already saved areas in the memory
(Y page 199).
i COMAND receives weather forecast data from the nearest weather station at the
selected destination.
Option 1: selecting the location in the
information chart
X Select Position in the information chart
by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.
"Selecting the area for the weather forecast" menu
X To select the current vehicle position:
select Current Position and pressW to confirm.
COMAND receives the weather data for the
current vehicle position from the nearest
weather station and displays it
automatically.
X To select the vicinity of the
destination: select Near Destination in
the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
i You can select Near Destination if a route has been calculated (Y page 57). The
menu item is otherwise grayed out.
X To select winter sport areas: select In
Winter Sports Areas in the menu, and
confirm by pressingW.
X Select a state, e.g. Colorado, and press
W to confirm.
X Select a winter sports area from the menu
and pressW to confirm. The weather data and other information is
displayed for the winter sports area that
has been selected. The data is supplied by
the nearest weather station.
The information chart shows the following
information (if available):
Rski slopes/ski lifts
Rsnowboarding and nighttime opening
Rsnow conditions (e.g. snow depth)
Rtemperature
X To select the vicinity of another
location: select Search Locations in the
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
198 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
X Select a state, e.g. Florida, and confirm
by pressingW.
X Select a category, e.g. Daytona Beach,
and pressW to confirm. The information chart shows the weather
forecast for the selected area. The data is
supplied by the nearest weather station.
Option 2: selecting the area in the
weather map
X Call up the weather map (Y page 200).
X Move the weather map so that the
crosshair is over the desired area
(Y page 200).
X PressW the COMAND controller. The information chart shows the weather
forecast for the selected area. The data is
supplied by the nearest weather station.
Memory functions
Storing the area in theweathermemory
For areas that are frequently called up, 10
presets (0, 1 9) are available in the weather
memory.
X In the preset memory: select the area for
the weather forecast (Y page 197).
The selected area is shown at the top in the
status bar.
X Select Position in the information chart
by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Memory and pressW to confirm.
X Select the preset by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller.
X Press and holdW the COMAND controller until the area is entered in the selected
preset.
X To store rapidly: in the daily forecast
(Y page 197) press and hold a number key,
e.g.l, until the preset position number
is shown in the status bar in front of the
area name.
i You can also use this function in the five- day forecast (Y page 197), and in the
detailed information view (Y page 197).
Selecting an area from the weather
memory
X From the weather memory: in the
information chart, select Position by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Memory and pressW to confirm.
X Select a preset that contains an entry by
turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The weather data of the selected area is
shown.
X Rapid selection: if there is an entry
available in the weather memory, e.g. when
SIRIUS Weather 199
W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
the daily forecast is shown, briefly press a
number key, such asl.
The weather data of the selected area is
shown.
Weather map
Calling up the weather map
X Select Map in the information chart by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The weather map appears in the 500 km
scale.
Weather map (example)
i For the map display, you can activate the topographic map style (Y page 103).
Moving the weather map
X Slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller.
The weather map moves in the
corresponding direction under the
crosshair.
Changing the scale
X As soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, you see the scale bar.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
Showing/hiding the menu in the
weather map
X To show: pressW the COMAND controller in the weather map.
X To hide: slide up ZV the COMAND controller.
Selecting a weather station in the map
X Move the weathermap and crosshair to the
desired position (Y page 200).
X PressW the COMAND controller. The menu is shown.
X Confirm Display Weather by pressing
W. COMAND receives the weather data for the
selected position from the nearest weather
station and displays it automatically as a
daily forecast.
200 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
Switching layers on the map on/off
You can switch on differing layers, for example to display the rain radar, weather fronts and
the course of tropical storms on the map.
X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 200).
X Select Layers by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.
X Select the layer by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Switch the display onO or off.
Explanation
Layer Map display Selectable
scales
Radar Map Shows the rain radar as a colored area on the map,
for an explanation of the colors, see the "Legend"
section (Y page 204).
All
Storm
Characteristic
s
Shows the characteristics of a storm
Characteristics are:
Rtornadic storm:
storm cell with strong winds (super cells), from
which a tornado (also know as twister) can
develop.
Rcyclone:
storm cells, from which a tornadic storm can
develop
Rhailstorm
Rthe likelihood of a hailstorm
All
Atmospheric
Pressure
Shows the position of high and low-pressure areas
(H, L), weather fronts and isobars
200 km, 500 km
SIRIUS Weather 201
W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
Layer Map display Selectable
scales
Tropical
Storm Tracks
Shows the path/directional movement speed of a
tropical storm with time and strength information
All
Winds Shows the wind direction and wind speed 5 km
There are a number of illustrated examples in the following section.
Sample displays of weather data in the
map
Rain radar
The Radar Map display layer is activated
(Y page 201) and weather data is available.
Weather map showing the rain radar
The precipitation radar legend can be called
up at (Y page 204).
Storm characteristics
The Storm Characteristics display layer
is activated (Y page 201) and weather data is
available.
Weather map showing a hailstorm and tornadic storms with the path and directional movement speed (example)
Weather map showing a hailstorm (example)
The storms legend can be called up
(Y page 204).
Displaying additional information
X Slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller and move the crosshair onto a
corresponding symbol.
X PressW the COMAND controller.
202 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
Weather map with information on a cyclone (example)
The following information is shown (if
available):
Rcategory of the tropical storm
Rdate and time of observation (time stamp)
Rdirectional movement speed and path
i The directional movement speed is the speed at which the storm cell moves.
Weather fronts
The Atmospheric Pressure display layer is
activated (Y page 201) and weather data is
available.
Weather map showing the position of high and low- pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars (example)
i Isobars are lines that show where the air pressure is the same.
Weather fronts (legend)
: Cold front (blue line with blue triangles)
; Warm front (red line with red semi-circles)
= Stationary front (red-blue line with red
semi-circles and blue triangles)
? Occlusion (violet line with a violet semi-
circle and triangles)
Weather
front
Explanation
Cold front If a cold front moves in, the
weather remains changeable
and there are often rain
showers and thunderstorms.
The air temperature
decreases.
Warm front This can mean longer periods
of rain and can lead to an
increase in cloud cover and a
slow increase in temperature.
Stationary
front
The weather front moves
minimally. The weather
remains changeable in this
area.
Occlusion This occurswhen a faster cold
front reaches an advancing
warm front and combines
with it. The weather remains
changeable and rainy within
an occlusion.
SIRIUS Weather 203
W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
Path of tropical storms
The Tropical Storm Tracks display layer
is activated (Y page 201) and weather data is
available.
Symbol? shows the current position of the
tropical cyclone.
A dashed line shows the path to date and the
predicted path of the cyclone.
More information; can be shown on the
following positions:
Rpositions of previous path=
Rcurrent position?
Rpositions on the predicted route with
information on date:
X In the map, slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller and slide the crosshair
to; or=.
X PressW the COMAND controller.
Weather map showing the path of a tropical low- pressure area and further information (example)
Showing information; (if available):
Rname of the tropical storm and category
Rtime stamp
Rdirectional movement speed and path
(Wind)
Rmaximum wind speed (Max. Wind Speed)
i The directional movement speed is the speed at which the storm cell of a tropical
storm moves.
A tropical storm is separated into different
categories according to the location at which
it develops.
Region of
origin
Category
Atlantic,
North and
South Pacific
Oceans
Tropical Low
Pressure System
Tropical Rain Zone
Tropical Storm
Hurricane Category 1
to Hurricane Category
5
Northwest
Pacific
Tropical Low
Pressure System
Tropical Cyclone
Typhoon
Super-Typhoon
Wind directions and wind speeds
Weather map showing wind directions and wind speeds (example)
Legend (precipitation radar and storms)
X Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 200).
X Select Layers by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Legend and pressW to confirm.
204 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
i The symbol for a tornadic storm is also valid for a cyclone (mesocyclone).
Precipitation type Color scale
Rain Seven color levels
from light (light
green) to heavy (red)
Mixed Light (light violet) to
heavy (violet)
Snow Light (light
turquoise) to heavy
(turquoise)
Time stamp
The time stamp showswhen theweather data
was created by the weather station.
X Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 200).
X Select Layers by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Time stamp and pressW to confirm.
The time stamps correspond to the time at
the vehicle's current position. The change
over from summer time to standard time is
performed automatically.
Changing to the information chart
X Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 200).
X Select Display Weather and pressW to confirm.
SIRIUS Weather 205
W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s
206
COMAND features ............................. 208
General information ......................... 208
Basic functions ................................. 213
System settings ................................ 215
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........ 216
Video DVD mode ............................... 221
Operation with an active COMAND
source ................................................ 225
AUX mode .......................................... 228
207
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
COMAND features
These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND system at the time of
purchase. Country-specific deviations are
possible. Please note that your COMAND
system may not be equipped with all the
features described.
General information
Important safety notes
G WARNING
The RSE CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laser
product. There is a danger of invisible laser
radiationwhen you open or damage the cover.
Do not remove the cover. The RSE CD/DVD
player does not contain any parts which can
be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,
have any necessary service work performed
by qualified personnel.
G WARNING
The driver should not wear a Rear Seat
Entertainment headset while operating the
vehicle under any circumstances. The use of
a headset while driving the vehicle could
drastically impair the ability to react to audible
traffic conditions (e.g. emergency sirens from
police/fire/ambulance, another car's horn,
etc.).
G WARNING
When not in use, headsets or external video
sources should be stored in a safe location
(e.g. one of the vehicle's storage
compartments) so that they are not loose
within the passenger compartment during
braking, vehicle maneuvers or a traffic
accident. Objects moving within the
passenger compartment could cause serious
personal injury to vehicle occupants.
G WARNING
Due to a potential choking hazard, wired
headset usage by children should only occur
with adult supervision.
Components
Overview
The Rear Seat Entertainment System is
comprised of:
Rtwo rear-compartment screens behind the
front-seat head restraints
Rthe remote control
Ra CD/DVD drive
RAUX jacks on both screens (AUX display)
and on the CD/DVD drive (AUX drive)
Rtwo sets of cordless headphones
208 General information R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Rear-compartment screens
: AUX jacks, detailed view in the "CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks" section (Y page 210)
; Display
Remote control
Overview
i Two remote controls are included in the scope of supply for the USA and Canada.
: Switches the screen on/off
; Switches the button lighting on/off
= Selects the screen for the remote control
? Selects a menu or menu item
General information 209
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
A Confirms a selection or setting
B Switches sound on/off (for corded
headphones)
C Adjusts the volume (for corded
headphones)
D Skips to a track, fast-forward/fast-rewind
E Selects a track; direct entry
F Exits a menu (back)
Selecting the screen for the remote
control
You can use the remote control to operate
one of the two rear screens at a time. To do
so, you must switch the remote control to the
desired screen.
X To select the left-hand screen: turn
thumbwheel= until "L REAR" is
highlighted in the window.
X To select the right-hand screen: turn
thumbwheel= until "REAR R" is
highlighted in the window.
Switching the screen on/off
If the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the
ignition lock (see the vehicle Operator's
Manual), or the SmartKey is not inserted, the
screens in the rear will switch off after 30
minutes. Before the screens switch off, they
show a message to this effect.
You can switch the screens back on.
However, this will discharge the starter
battery.
X Point the remote control at the rear-
compartment screen which has been
selected for remote operation.
X Press button: on the remote control.
The respective rear screen switches on or
off.
i You can only switch the screens on using the remote control if the ignition is
switched on.
Switching the button lighting on/off
X Press button; on the remote control.
Depending on the previous status, the
button lighting is switched on or off.
i If you do not use the remote control for about 15 seconds, the button lighting
switches off automatically.
Switching the sound on/off (corded
headphones only)
X Press buttonB on the remote control.
The sound is switched on/off.
Selecting a menu/menu item and
confirming your selection
X Select a menu/menu item using the
=;9: buttons on the
remote control and press the9 button to confirm.
CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks
: CD/DVD slot
; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(red)
= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
(white)
? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
A CD/DVD eject button
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.
Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand
side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX
display), (Y page 209).
210 General information R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Cordless headphones
Overview
: Volume control
; Selects a screen for the headphones
= Battery compartment cover
? Switches the cordless headphones on/off
A Indicator lamp with various displays (Y page 211)
X Open both sides of the headphones and adjust the fit of the headphones by pulling the
headphone band in the direction of the arrow.
Switching the cordless headphones
on/off
X Press button?.
Depending on the previous status, the
headphones are switched on or off. To save
the battery, the headphones are switched
off automatically if they do not receive an
audio signal within three minutes.
Adjusting the volume of the
headphones
X Turn volume control: until the desired
volume has been set.
i If you have connected corded headphones to a rear-compartment
screen, you can adjust the volume by
pressing buttonsC on the remote control
(Y page 209).
Selecting a screen for the headphones
X Move push slider; to L (left-hand screen)
or R (right-hand screen).
Indicator lamp displays
The color of the indicator lamp shows
whether the headphones are switched on or
off and indicates the charge level of the
batteries inserted.
General information 211
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
LED
display
Status
Green The batteries are fine.
Red The batteries are almost
discharged.
Lit
continuous
ly
The headphones are switched
on and connected to a screen.
Flashing The headphones are
searching for the connection
to a screen.
No display
(dark)
The headphones are switched
off or the batteries are
discharged.
Connecting additional headphones
You can connect one additional set of corded
headphones to each of the two rear screens
(Y page 209). The socket is designed for
headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo jack plug
and an impedance of 32 ohms.
Changing batteries
Notes
Batteries are required for the remote control
and for the two sets of cordless headphones.
G WARNING
Keep the batteries out of the reach of
children. Consult a doctor immediately if a
child should swallow a battery.
Do not dismantle, short-circuit or burn a
battery.
H Environmental note
Dispose of discharged batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
On the remote control
: Battery compartment
; Catch tab
= Battery compartment cover
? Retaining lugs
A Batteries
The remote control contains 2 type AAA,
1.5 V batteries.
X To open the battery compartment:
remove battery compartment cover= on
the back of the remote control.
X To do so, press down catch tab; and
remove battery compartment cover=.
X Remove discharged batteriesA from the
tray.
212 General information R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
X Insert the new batteries. Observe the
polarity markings on the batteries and
battery compartment when doing so.
Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
must face upwards.
Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
must face downwards.
X To close the battery compartment:
insert battery compartment cover=
starting with retaining lugs? into the
battery compartment and allow catch
tab; to engage in place.
On the cordless headphones
The battery compartment cover is located on
the left headphone.
: Battery compartment cover
The cordless headphones contain 2 type AAA,
1.5 V batteries.
X To open the battery compartment: flip
battery compartment cover: upwards.
As you do so, hold the left-hand side of the
headphones as shown to prevent the
batteries from falling out.
X Remove the discharged batteries from the
tray.
X Insert the new batteries. Observe the
polarity markings on the batteries and
battery compartment when doing so.
Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
must face upwards.
Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
must face downwards.
X To close the battery compartment:
press battery compartment cover
downwards until it engages into place.
If the batteries have been inserted
correctly, the indicator lamp will light up
green when the headphones are switched
on.
Basic functions
Using headphones
You can use the cordless headphones
supplied and/or up to two sets of corded
headphones connected to the corresponding
jack of the rear-compartment screens
(Y page 209).
Information on:
Rswitching the cordless headphones on/off
Radjusting the volume of the headphones
Rselecting a screen for the headphones
can be found in the Cordless headphones
section (Y page 211).
Using the main loudspeakers
This function is available in conjunction with
COMAND.
You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to
listen to a disc inserted in the rear-
compartment drive. To do so, at least one of
the rear-compartment screensmust be set to
disc mode.
X To set using COMAND: press, for
example, the$ function button to
switch on an audio mode.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Audio menu appears.
X Select Rear Audio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
Basic functions 213
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
i The headphones' volume setting does not affect the main loudspeakers.
Adjusting the sound settings
You can select the sound settings in the audio
CD/DVD/MP3, video DVD and AUX modes.
X Switch on an operating mode (e.g. audio
CD mode) (Y page 217).
X Select Treble or Bass using
the:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.
Multiple users
Simultaneous use of the rear-
compartment disc drive
The two rear-compartment screens can be
operated almost entirely independently from
one another. However, there can be a conflict
in some menus if the two screens are used
simultaneously.
If the rear-compartment disc drive is being
used for both screens simultaneously,
selecting certain menus or settings on one of
the screens also affects the other screen.
The following functions affect both screens:
Rchanging playback options
Rselecting a track (from a track list or folder)
Rusing the play, pause and stop functions
Rfast forwarding/rewinding or scrolling
Rcalling up the DVD menu and navigating
within it
Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera
angle
Rcalling up interactive DVD content
The following functions affect only one
screen:
Raudio and video functions as well as picture
settings
Rswitching between full screen and the
menu
Switching between operating modes
When you exit an operating mode (e.g. audio
CD mode), the current setting is saved. If you
call up this operating mode again later, there
are two possibilities:
Rthe operating mode has been changed on
the other screen.
Rthe operating mode has not been changed.
In the first case, the operating mode appears
as it is on the other screen.
In the second case, the setting appears on the
screen as it was when you last exited the
operating mode.
Picture settings
Overview
You can select these settings in video DVD
and AUX mode. Instructions for AUX mode
are detailed later (Y page 228).
Adjusting the brightness, contrast and
color
X Switch on video DVD mode (Y page 221).
X To show the menu: press the9 button on the remote control.
or
X Select (Y page 188)Menu while the
navigation menu is shown and press the
9 button to confirm.
X Select DVD-Video using
the:=; buttons and press the
9 button to confirm.
214 Basic functions R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Example: TV mode
: Brightness, contrast and color
; Picture formats
X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color
using the9: buttons and press the
9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.
Changing the picture format
X To show the menu: press the9 button on the remote control.
or
X Select (Y page 188)Menu while the
navigation menu is shown and press the
9 button to confirm.
X Select DVD-Video using
the:=; buttons and press the
9 button to confirm. The dot in front of one of the menu items
16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or Widescreen
indicates the format currently selected.
X Select a format using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.
System settings
Note
You can adjust almost all system settings
individually for each screen without affecting
the other screen. You make these settings
using the remote control (Y page 209).
Selecting the display language
X Select System using the9=; button on the remote control and press
9 to confirm. You see the system menu on the selected
rear screen.
X Select Settings with the: button and
press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Language using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. The list of languages appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.
X Select a language using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. The Rear Seat Entertainment System
activates the selected language.
Switching the display design
X Select Settings with the: button and
press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or
Automatic using the9: buttons
and press the9 button to confirm. The dot indicates the current setting.
Design Explanation
Day Mode The display is set
permanently to day
design.
Night Mode The display is set
permanently to night
design.
Automatic The display design
changes depending on
the vehicle instrument
cluster illumination.
System settings 215
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
Setting the brightness
X Select Settings with the: button and
press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Brightness using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. A scale appears.
X Adjust the brightness using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. The brightness bar moves up or down. The
picture becomes lighter or darker in
accordance with the scale.
Showing/hiding the picture
X To hide the picture: select Display Off
in the system menu using the:; buttons on the remote control and press
the9 button to confirm. The picture is hidden.
X To display the picture: press the9 button.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Safety note
G WARNING
The RSE CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laser
product. There is a danger of invisible laser
radiationwhen you open or damage the cover.
Do not remove the cover. The RSE CD/DVD
player does not contain any parts which can
be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,
have any necessary service work performed
by qualified personnel.
General information
You will find information on the following
topics in the Audio section:
Rnotes on CDs/DVDs (Y page 165)
Rnotes on MP3 mode (Y page 164)
Rnotes on copyright (Y page 165)
Inserting a CD/DVD
Depending on the model and the vehicle
equipment, the CD/DVD drive is located:
Rbehind the center console in a folding
compartment, or
Rin the center under the rear seats, or
Rin the armrest between the rear seats
: Disc slot
; Disc eject button
The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If
there is already a disc inserted, this must be
ejected before another is inserted.
X Insert a disc into the disc slot.
The printed side of the disc must face
upwards. If neither side of the disc is
printed, the side you wish to play must face
downwards.
The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc.
216 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
The CD/DVD drive plays the disc:
Rif it has been inserted correctly and is a
permissible disc, and
Rafter you have switched on disc mode
(audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 mode)
(Y page 217).
Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loaded
by the drive. Loading may take some time,
depending on the number of folders and
tracks.
Removing a CD/DVD
X Press the button.
The drive ejects the disc.
X Take the disc out of the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot,
the drive will draw it in again automatically
after a short while.
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or
MP3 mode
X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 216).
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the inserted disc.
X Select Disc in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and confirm by pressing the9 button.
The corresponding mode is switched on.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System plays
the disc.
Example: audio CD mode
: Type of data medium_
; Track number
= Track name (only if stored on the disc as
CD text)
? Track time
A Graphic time and track display
B Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
C To set the bass
D To set the treble
E Disc name (if stored on the disc as CD
text)
F To call up the track list
G Playback options
Example: audio DVD mode
: Type of data medium
; Track number
= Track name (if stored on the disc)
? Track time
A Graphic time and track display
B Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 217
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
C To set the bass
D To set the treble
E Disc name (if stored on the disc)
F To call up the track list
G Stop function
H Pause function
I Playback options
Example: MP3 mode
: Type of data medium
; Track number
= Track name
? Track time
A Graphic time and track display
B Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
C To set the bass
D To set the treble
E Disc name or current folder
F To call up the folder list
G Playback options; to switch track
information on/off
i Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result in the elapsed time shown being different
from the actual elapsed time.
Selecting a track
Selecting by skipping to a track
X To skip forwards or backwards to a
track: press the= or; button on
the remote control.
or
X Press theE orF button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
Skipping backwards restarts the current
track (if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds) or starts the previous track
(if the current track has only been playing
for a shorter time).
If you have selected the playback options
Random Tracks or Random Folder, the
track order is random.
Selecting by track list
In audio CD mode, the track list contains all
tracks on the disc currently playing.
In audio DVD mode, the track list contains all
tracks in the currently active group; see
"Setting the audio format" (Y page 163).
In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks
in the currently active folder as well as the
folder structure, allowing you to select any
track on the MP3 CD.
X Select Tracks (audio CD/DVD mode) or
Folder (MP3 mode) using
the:=; buttons on the remote
control, and confirm by pressing the9 button.
or
X Press the9 button when the display/ selection window is selected.
The track list appears. The# dot indicates the current track.
X Select a track using the9: buttons
and press the9 button to confirm.
218 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Making a selectionby entering the track
number directly
X Press theh button on the remote
control.
The track entry display appears.
Example: track 2
X Press number button 2.
Example: track 12
X Press the corresponding number keys in
rapid succession.
i It is not possible to enter numbers that exceed the number of tracks on the CD or
in the currently active folder.
X Wait for approximately three seconds after
making the entry.
You will hear the track which has been
entered. The corresponding basic menu
then reappears.
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X With the display/selection window active,
press the= or; button on the
remote control repeatedly until you reach
the desired position.
or
X Press and hold theE orF button
until the desired position is reached.
Selecting a folder
This function is only available in MP3 mode.
X Select Folder in MP3 mode using
the:=; buttons on the remote
controller and press the9 button to confirm.
or
X Press the9 button when the display/ selection window is selected.
The folder content appears.
: Folder selection symbol
; Current folder name
= Track symbol
X To switch to the superordinate folder:
select icon: using the9: buttons
on the remote control and press the9 button to confirm.
The display shows the next folder up.
: Folder selection symbol
; Folder icon
X Select a folder using the9: buttons
and press the9 button to confirm. You will see the tracks in the folder.
X Select a track using the9: buttons
and press the9 button to confirm. The track is played and the corresponding
folder is now the active folder.
Pause function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 219
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
X To pause playback: select using
the:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the9 button to confirm. The display changes to.
X To continue playback: select and
press the9 button to confirm. The display changes to.
Stop function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
X To interrupt playback: select using
the:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the9 button to confirm. The display changes to.
X To continue playback: select and
press the9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
X To stop playback: while playback is
interrupted, select again and press
the9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the
beginning of the DVD. is highlighted.
X To restart playback: select and
press the9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the
DVD.
Setting the audio format
Further information on audio formats is
available in the "Audio" section
(Y page 163).
X Select DVD-A using the:=; buttons on the remote controller and press
9 to confirm.
X Select Group using the9: buttons
and press the9 button to confirm. The list of available audio formats appears.
The# dot indicates the format currently selected.
X Select an audio format using the
9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.
Playback options
Further information on playback options is
available in the "Audio" section
(Y page 163).
X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 using
the:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the9 button to confirm. The options list appears. The# dot indicates the option currently selected.
X Select Normal Track Sequence, Random
Tracks or Random Folder using the
9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal Track Sequence, you will
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window.
i If you change the disc, the Normal Track Sequence option is activated
automatically. If an option is selected, it
remains selected after the Rear Seat
Entertainment System is switched on or
off.
Switching track information on/off
(MP3 mode only)
If the function is switched on, folder and track
names are displayed.
If the function is switched off, disc and file
names are displayed.
X Select MP3 using the:=; buttons on the remote controller and press
the9 button to confirm.
220 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
X Select Display Track Information
using the9: buttons and press the
9 button to confirm. The function is switched onO or off, depending on the previous status.
Video DVD mode
General information
Here you will find further information on the
following topics:
Rsafety notes (Y page 154)
Rnotes on DVDs (Y page 186)
DVD playback conditions
Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs. There is a large variety of discs,
DVD authoring software, writing software and
writers available. This variety means that
there is no guarantee that the Rear Seat
Entertainment System will be able to play
video DVDs that you have copied yourself.
You will find further information in the Video
section (Y page 187). Information regarding
COMAND also applies to the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that
certain functions or actions described in this
sectionwill be temporarily blocked ormay not
function at all. As soon as you try to activate
these functions or actions, you will see the
K symbol in the display.
Inserting and removing a CD/DVD
X Proceed as described in the "Audio CD/
DVD and MP3 mode" section
(Y page 216).
Switching to video DVD mode
X Insert a video DVD.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the disc.
If disc mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as
described in the following instruction.
X Select Disc in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and confirm by pressing the9 button.
If the video DVD fulfills the playback
criteria, the film either starts automatically
or the menu saved on the DVD appears. If
the DVD menu appears, you must start the
film manually.
X Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu.
Hiding/showing the navigation menu
X To show: press the9 or: button
on the remote control.
X To hide: press the9 or: button.
or
X Wait for approximately eight seconds.
Navigation menu
: Disc type
; Current title
= Current scene
Video DVD mode 221
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
? Track time
A To show the menu
Showing/hiding the menu
X To show: press the9 button on the remote control.
or
X Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the9 button to confirm.
X To hide: press the9 button, select
Full Screen and press the9 button to confirm.
Menu system
: Video DVD options
; Pause function
= Stop function
? To set the treble
A To set the bass
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X Press and hold theE orF button on
the remote control until the desired
position has been reached.
You see the navigation menu.
Pause function
X To show the menu: press the9 button on the remote control.
or
X Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the9 button to confirm.
X To pause playback: select and press
the9 button to confirm. The display changes to.
X To continue playback: select and
press the9 button to confirm. The menu is hidden.
Stop function
X To show the menu: press the9 button on the remote control.
or
X Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the9 button to confirm.
X To interrupt playback: select and
press the9 button to confirm. The display changes to. The
video image is hidden.
X To continue playback: select and
press the9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted. The menu is hidden.
X To stop playback: while playback is
interrupted, select again and press
the9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the
beginning of the DVD. is highlighted.
X To restart playback: select and
press the9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the
DVD.
222 Video DVD mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Selecting a scene/chapter
Note
Further information on this function is
available in the "Video" section
(Y page 189).
Skipping forwards/backwards
X Press the= or; button on the
remote control.
or
X Press theE orF button.
The navigation menu (Y page 188) appears
for approximately eight seconds.
Selecting a scene/chapter directly
The examples illustrate how to select scene/
chapter 5.
X Option 1: while the film is playing, press
theh button on the remote control.
X Press the corresponding number key, such
as 5.
X Option 2: while the film is playing, press
the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Scene Selection and press the
9 button to confirm.
X Select 5 using the9 or: button and
press the9 button to confirm. In both cases, playback will begin from the
fifth scene/chapter after a brief pause.
Selecting a film/title
Note
Further information on this function is
available in the "Video" section
(Y page 189).
Option 1
X Press the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.
X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Title Selection and press the
9 button to confirm.
X To call up the selection list: press the
9 button.
X Select a film/track.
Option 2
Example: selecting film 2
X Press button 2.
After a brief pause, the second film is
played.
DVD menu
Note
You will find further information on the DVD
menu in the "Video" section (Y page 190).
Calling up the DVD menu
X Press the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.
X Select Video-DVD and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.
Video DVD mode 223
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Menu and press the9 button to confirm.
The DVD menu appears.
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
X Select a menu item using the
9:=; buttons on the
remote control and press the9 button to confirm.
A menu appears.
i Menu items which cannot be selected are shown in gray.
X Confirm Select by pressing the9 button. The Rear Seat Entertainment System
carries out the action or shows a submenu.
X If available, additional options can now be
selected.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System then
switches back to the DVD menu.
i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: Back (to movie), Play,
Stop,.,/ or Go Upmay either not
function at all ormay not function at certain
points in the DVD menu. To indicate this,
theK icon appears in the display.
Stopping a film or skipping to the
beginning or end of a scene
X Select any menu item from the DVD menu.
The menu appears.
X To stop the film: select the Stop menu
item and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.
X To skip to the end of a scene: select
the/ menu item and press the9 button to confirm.
X To skip to the beginning of a scene:
select the. menu item and press the
9 button to confirm.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu
X Option 1: press the% back button on
the remote control or select the
corresponding menu item in the DVD
menu.
X Option 2: select any menu item in the DVD
menu.
X Select the Go Up menu item in the menu
and press the9 button to confirm.
Back to the film
X Option 1: press the% back button on
the remote control repeatedly until you see
the film, or select the corresponding menu
item in the DVD menu.
X Option 2: select any menu item in the DVD
menu and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select the Back (to movie)menu item in
the menu and press the9 button to confirm.
Setting the audio format
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it
is available, you can set the audio language
or the audio format. The number of settings
is determined by the DVD content. It may also
224 Video DVD mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
be possible to access the settings from the
DVD menu.
X Press the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.
X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Audio Language and press the9 button to confirm.
A menu appears after a short while. The
# dot in front of an entry indicates the currently selected language.
X Select a language using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.
Subtitles and camera angle
These functions are not available on all DVDs.
The number of subtitle languages and camera
angles available depends on the content of
the DVD. It may also be possible to access
the settings from the DVD menu.
X Press the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.
X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and
press the9 button to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few
seconds. The# dot in front of an entry indicates the current setting.
X Select a setting using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.
Interactive content
DVDs can also contain interactive content
(e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may
be able to influence events by selecting and
triggering actions. The type and number of
actions depend on the DVD.
X Select an action using the
9;:= buttons on the
remote control and press the9 button to execute it.
A menu appears and the first entry,
Select, is highlighted.
X Press the9 button.
Operation with an active COMAND
source
Switching the function on/off in
COMAND
You can transfer an audio or video source
selected in COMAND to the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
i If you then switchmodes in COMAND, the new source will not be transmitted to the
Rear Seat Entertainment System.
X To switch on the function in COMAND:
switch on the desired audio mode in
COMAND, e.g. CD mode (Y page 157), or
show the menu in video DVD mode
(Y page 188).
X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.
Operation with an active COMAND source 225
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
X Select Active Aud./Vid. Source For
Rear and pressW to confirm.
In the status bar at the top, you will see the
headphones icon and the_ icon for the
source that has been switched on.
X To switch off the function in COMAND:
switch on the desired audio mode in
COMAND or show the menu in video DVD
mode.
X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.
X Select Rear Audio/Video Off_ and
pressW the COMAND controller to confirm.
Selecting an active COMAND source
in the rear-compartment screen
Loading the active COMAND source
X Select COMAND using the9=; buttons on the remote control and press
9 to confirm. The audio or video source selected in
COMAND is loaded in the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
When the loading process is complete, the
audio or video source is set in the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
If Rear Audio/Video Off is activated in
COMAND, the COMAND is off or there
is no active COMAND source message
appears.
Audio CD mode
Example: CD mode
226 Operation with an active COMAND source R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
X To select a track by skipping to a
track: press the= or; button on
the remote control.
or
X Press theE orF button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
Skipping backwards restarts the current
track (if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds) or starts the previous track
(if the current track has only been playing
for a shorter time).
Additional setting option:
Rselecting the sound settings (Y page 214)
Audio DVD mode
Example: audio DVD mode
X To skip to the next/previous group:
press the: button on the remote
control.
X Highlight with the= or; orb or
c button and press9 to confirm.
i Information on groups can be found in the "Setting the audio format" section
(Y page 163).
Additional setting option:
Rselecting the sound settings (Y page 214)
MP3 mode
Example: MP3 mode
X To select a track by skipping to a
track: press the= or; button on
the remote control.
or
X Press theE orF button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
Skipping backwards restarts the current
track (if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds) or starts the previous track
(if the current track has only been playing
for a shorter time).
X To select a folder: press the: button
on the remote control.
X Highlight one of the two folder symbols
with the= or; button and press
9 to confirm. Depending on your selection, the previous
or next folder is selected and the first track
is played.
Additional setting option:
Rselecting the sound settings (Y page 214)
Operation with an active COMAND source 227
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
Video DVD mode
Example: video DVD mode
X To hide a menu: confirm Menu with the
9 button. The video image is played in full screen
mode.
Additional setting options:
Rsetting the brightness, contrast and color
(Y page 214)
Rchanging the picture format (Y page 215)
Rselecting the sound settings (Y page 214)
AUX mode
Introduction
You can connect one external video source to
each of the displays of the Rear Seat
Entertainment System (AUX display) and also
one external video source to the rear-
compartment CD/DVD drive (AUX drive) with
a sound and video signal.
Please see the corresponding operating
instructions for information on how to
operate the external video source.
For further details about external video
sources, please consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Connecting AUX equipment
AUX drive
The AUX drive jacks are located on the CD/
DVD drive next to the CD/DVD eject button
(Y page 210).
Displaying AUX
The AUX display jacks are on the side of the
screen (Y page 209).
Audio and video connection
X Insert the audio plugs for the left and right
signals into the corresponding L and R
jacks.
X Insert the video plug into the V jack.
Activating AUX mode
AUX drive
X Select Aux in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and press the9 button to confirm. The AUX menu appears.
AUX menu
X Select Source from the AUX menu and
press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Disk Drive Aux and press the9 button to confirm.
You will hear and see the content of the
external video source if it is connected to
the CD/DVD drive and switched to
228 AUX mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
playback. If no video image is available
from the AUX source connected, you will
see an audio menu.
Displaying AUX
X Select the screen by turning the scroll
wheel on remote control (Y page 210) until
"L REAR " (left screen) or "REAR R" (right
screen) is highlighted in the window.
X Select Aux in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Source from the AUX menu and
press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Display Aux and press the9 button to confirm.
You will see and hear the content of the
video source if it is switched to playback. If
no video image is available from the AUX
source connected, you will see an audio
menu.
Adjusting treble and bass
X Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu
and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the9 or: button and press the9 button to confirm.
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or
color
X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux
in the AUX menu and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color
and press the9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the9 or: button and press the9 button to confirm.
Changing the picture format
X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux
in the AUX menu and press the9 button to confirm.
X Select 16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or
Widescreen using the9: buttons
and press the9 button to confirm. The dot in front of a menu item indicates
the current setting.
AUX mode 229
R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m
Z
230
231
Related manuals for Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the E-Class Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Operating Instructions for Mercedes-Benz E-Class as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Operating Instructions should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz E-Class. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.